AV Receiver
Owner’s Manual
Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.
English
CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
FEATURES
6
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . . 41
Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
PREPARATIONS
14
General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PLAYBACK
49
Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
HD Radio™ tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
En
2
Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 117
Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 119
ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
CONFIGURATIONS
92
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Programming from other remote controls (learning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Clearing functions learned from other remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders
(Sound Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Sound Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
En
3
APPENDIX
129
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
En
4
Accessories
Operating range of the remote control
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.
 Remote control
 Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)
Within
6 m (20 ft)
30°
30°
Insert the batteries the right
way round.
 AM antenna
 FM antenna
*One of the above is supplied depending on the region
of purchase.
 YPAO microphone
 Power cable
• The illustrations of the main unit used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise
specified.
*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region
of purchase.
 CD-ROM
(Owner’s Manual)
 Easy Setup Guide
 Safety Brochure
• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.
• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
•
indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.
•
indicates supplementary explanations for better use.
Accessories
En
5
FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Wide variety of supported content
• iPod/iPhone/iPad
. p.65
• USB
. p.69
• Media server (PC/NAS)
. p.72
• Internet radio
. p.75
• AirPlay
. p.77
Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker
system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows
you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.41
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.53
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert halls
(CINEMA DSP)
• Enjoying compressed music with
. p.57
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
Control
Network contents
Speakers
iPod/iPhone/iPad
Audio
• Bi-amp connections, channel
expansion (with external power-amp)
and multi-zone configurations to
enhance your system
. p.20
Audio
USB device
HDMI Control
3D and 4K signals supported
Audio
HDMI Control
Audio/Video
BD/DVD player
Audio/Video
TV
Control
Audio/Video
(via HDMI/MHL)
Smartphone/Tablet
AV receiver (the unit)
Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
Change the input source and favorite
settings with one touch (SCENE)
. p.50
TV remote control
. p.141
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit
En
6
Full of useful functions!
Useful tips
❑ Connecting various devices (p.31)
❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.53)
A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.
Connecting front presence speakers allows you to
create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own
room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence
speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker
(VPS) function produces 3D surround sound.
I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for
video and non-HDMI for audio...
Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the
type of an audio input jack to be used for the
corresponding input source (p.90).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.106).
BD/DVD
player
I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.109).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.
Set-top box
Game
console
Camcorder
I want to use the supplied remote control to operate
external devices…
TV
Register the remote control codes of the external
devices (such as a TV and BD/DVD players) (p.123).
❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.26)
When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio
input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control
signals.
HDMI Control
TV audio
Video from
external device
❑ Easy operation and wireless music
playback from iPhone or Android device
By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an
iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices. Visit the
Yamaha website for details.
I want to change the on-screen menu language...
❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58)
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, Japanese, French, German,
Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.40).
The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You
can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.
I want to update the firmware...
❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.57)
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays
back the selected source with the least circuitry, which
lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
❑ Easy operation with a TV screen
Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu
to update the unit’s firmware (p.122). If the unit is
connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed
on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.128).
Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.
• Input settings (p.92)
You can navigate through different types of content
(such as iPod, USB, and network), view information, or
easily configure the settings using the on-screen menu.
• SCENE settings (p.95)
❑ Low power consumption
• Information view (such as audio signal and video
signal) (p.118)
The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption (p.117).
• Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.98)
• Various function settings (p.101)
• System settings (p.119)
FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit
En
7
Part names and functions
Front panel
1
2
3
4
5
MAIN ZONE
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
INPUT
6
1 MAIN ZONE z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.109)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.110)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.111)
• An iPod is being charged (p.65)
7
7 Front panel door
For protecting controls and jacks (p.9).
8 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.
8
Opening the front panel door
• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently
press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed
when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.
(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)
3 Front display
Displays information (p.10).
4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.5).
5 PURE DIRECT key
Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.57).
6 INPUT knob
Selects an input source.
FEATURES ➤
Part names and functions
En
8
■ Inside of the front panel door
9
0
ON SCREEN
AB C
OPTION
DE
F
GH
SCENE
TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
1
2
3
K
INFO
MEMORY
PRESET
FM
AM
TUNING
L
4
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
IJ
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
5V
M
9 ON SCREEN key
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
0 Menu operations keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
A OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.87).
B DISPLAY key
2.1A
VIDEO
N
O
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.88).
Adjusts the right/left channel volume balance for Zone2
(p.85).
D STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.56).
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
HDMI/
MHL 5V
1A
P
E PROGRAM keys
J FM and AM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.52).
F SCENE keys
G MULTI ZONE keys
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROL
Switch between FM and AM (p.58).
K PRESET keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.50).
Displays status information on the TV (p.86).
C TONE/BALANCE key
L
Enables/disables the audio output to
Zone2 (p.84).
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2)
that is controlled by the keys and knobs
on the front panel (p.84).
H INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.86).
I MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.59).
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.59).
L TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.58).
M USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.69) or an iPod
(p.65).
N YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.41).
O PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.
P VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game
console (p.34, 35) or a smartphone (p.35).
FEATURES ➤
Part names and functions
En
9
Front display (indicators)
1
2
34
6
5
HD
STEREO TUNED
ZONE
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
A
PL L C R PR
SL
SW
SR
SBL SB SBR
B
1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.
IN
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.
OUT1/OUT2
Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI
signal.
2 STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.
TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.
HD
(U.S.A. model only)
Lights up when the unit is receiving an HD Radio station
signal.
3 ZONE2
Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.84).
9
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PARTY
3
0
8
7
B
6 Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.86).
7 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.
8 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.
9 ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.88) is working.
0 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.57) is
working.
C
C Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)
J Surround back speaker (R)
K Surround back speaker
Z Front presence speaker (L)
X Front presence speaker (R)
L Subwoofer
A CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.53) is working. “CINEMA
DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53) is activated.
B Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.
4 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.
5 PARTY
Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.85)
FEATURES ➤
Part names and functions
En
10
Rear panel
1
2
3 4 56 7
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
89
2
ARC
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
AV 1
B
C
AV 2
AV 3
Y
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
PB
C
AV 5
AV 6
TRIGGER
OUT
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
GND
1
REMOTE
IN
OUT
AV 2
2
B
D
AV 4
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
(U.S.A. model)
AV 7
PR
A
AUDIO 1
E
RS-232C
AV 4
AV 1
L
D
(1 BD/DVD)
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
A
HDMI
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
1
PHONO
:
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
12V
ZONE OUT
CENTER
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
0.1A
1
R
2
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP EXTRA SP
AC IN
L
(4 RADIO)
AM
SINGLE
1 PHONO jacks
For connecting to a turntable (p.33).
2 DC OUT jack
For connecting to an optional accessory.
3 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.37).
4 AV 1–4 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.31).
5 AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.37).
6 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(composite video/S-video) jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video or
S-video and outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting
to a Zone2 video monitor (p.81).
7 HDMI OUT 1 jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.26). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
8 HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.31), or for connecting to an
HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.82).
9 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–4) jacks
For connecting to video playback devices that support
component video and inputting video signals (p.32).
0 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.31).
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
B REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that
allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another
room (p.83).
C TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks
For connecting to devices that support the trigger function
(p.38).
D RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.
Consult your dealer for details.
E VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.39).
A MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
(component video) jacks
For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.30) or for connecting to a Zone2
video monitor (p.81).
FEATURES ➤
Part names and functions
En
11
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
HDMI
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
1
2
ARC
PHONO
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
PB
C
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
AV 1
A
Y
GND
1
REMOTE
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR
IN
OUT
AV 2
2
B
D
AV 4
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
(U.S.A. model)
RS-232C
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
12V
ZONE OUT
CENTER
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
0.1A
1
R
2
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
L
R
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP EXTRA SP
AC IN
L
(4 RADIO)
AM
SINGLE
F G
F ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.36).
G AUDIO 1–4 jacks
For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting
audio signals (p.33).
H MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting to a device that supports multi-channel
output and inputting audio signals (p.38).
H
I
J
K
L
* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.
J PRE OUT jacks
For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.18) or
to an external power amplifier (p.24).
K SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.15).
L AC IN jack
For connecting the supplied power cable (p.39).
I ZONE OUT jacks
For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and
for outputting audio (p.81).
FEATURES ➤
Part names and functions
En
12
Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter
1
Transmits infrared signals.
2 SOURCE z key
2
RECEIVER
SOURCE
Turns on/off an external device.
SOURCE key
AV
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
Sets the remote control to operate external devices (p.124).
This key lights up in green after pressed.
RECEIVER key
AUDIO
Sets the remote control to operate the unit (p.124). This key
lights up in orange after pressed.
RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.
TUNER
4
5
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
6
PROGRAM
7
TOP MENU
8
VOLUME
MUTE
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
9
B
C
D
E
G
H
I
J
K
DISPLAY
L
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
Select an input source for playback.
AV 1–7
AV 1–7 jacks
V-AUX
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
AUDIO 1–4 AUDIO 1–4 jacks
PHONO
PHONO jacks
MULTI
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
USB
USB jack (on the front panel)
NET
NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
TUNER
FM/AM radio
4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch
5 SCENE keys
Select the registered input source, sound program, and
various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when
it is in standby mode (p.50).
6 PROGRAM keys
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
Select a sound program (p.52).
7 External device operation keys
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
Select menus for external devices (p.124).
5
6
9
0
3
7
8 ON SCREEN key
4
Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.
8
9 Menu operation keys
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
F
3 Input selection keys
Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by
the remote control (p.84).
ENTER
RETURN
:
A
HDMI OUT
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
M
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
0 MODE key
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.67).
(U.S.A. model only) Selects an HD Radio audio program
(p.60).
A Radio keys
Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.58).
BAND
Switches between FM and AM radio.
PRESET
Select a preset station.
TUNING
Select the radio frequency.
External device operation keys
Let you play back and perform other operations for external
devices when an input source other than “TUNER” is
selected (p.124).
B Sound mode keys
Select a sound mode (p.52).
C INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.86).
D SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).
E Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.
MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.59).
F TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.123).
G HDMI OUT key
Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output
(p.49).
H PARTY key
Turns on/off the party mode (p.85).
I VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.
J MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.
K OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.87).
L DISPLAY key
Displays status information on the TV (p.86).
M CODE SET key
Registers remote control codes of external devices on the
remote control (p.123).
• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.123).
FEATURES ➤
Part names and functions
En
13
PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Connecting speakers (p.15)
Basic speaker configuration (p.16)
Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.
Advanced speaker configuration (p.20)
Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone
configurations to enhance the system.
2 Connecting a TV (p.26)
Connect a TV to the unit.
3 Connecting playback devices (p.31)
Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.36)
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
5 Connecting to a network (p.37)
Connect the unit to a network.
6 Connecting other devices (p.37)
Connect external devices such as recording devices.
7 Connecting the power cable (p.39)
After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
8
Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.40)
Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).
9
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.41)
Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).
This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!
PREPARATIONS
➤ General setup procedure
En
14
1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Connecting speakers
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.20).
Caution
• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.18).
Ideal speaker layout
Functions of each speaker
Speaker type
Abbr.
Front (L)
1
Function
Front (R)
2
Center
3
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).
Surround (L)
4
Surround (R)
5
Produce surround right/left channel sounds. Surround speakers also
produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back
speakers are connected.
Surround
back (L)
6
E
Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
7
Front
presence (L)
E
Front
presence (R)
R
Subwoofer
9
1
9
Produce surround back right/left channel sounds.
Surround
back (R)
R
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m
(1.6 to 3.3 ft)
1.8 m
(5.9 ft)
2
3
9
Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP
3D (p.53), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional
sound field in your room.
Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces
bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the
unit and place them on the right/left (or front/rear) sides of the room.
4
5
10°~30°
10°~30°
6
• We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields.
However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to
produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.53).
7
0.3 m (1 ft) or more
• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the
speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker
settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.
• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”
and “SBR” in the diagram).
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers
En
15
1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Basic speaker configuration
■ Placing speakers in your room
Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.
❑ 7.1+2-channel system
(using both surround back and front presence speakers)
❑ 7.1-channel system
(using front presence speakers)
This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy
a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a highly-natural
3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying 5.1-channel contents.
❑ 7.1-channel system (using surround back speakers)
• The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit
automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.53).
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to
enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers
En
16
1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
❑ 5.1-channel system
❑ 2.1-channel system
This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and
surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and is suited for enjoying
5.1-channel contents.
Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround
speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound
(Virtual CINEMA DSP).
❑ Front 5.1-channel system
• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.
E
R
1
9
2
3
This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural
3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front
speakers to allow you to enjoy multi-channel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers
En
17
1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
■ Setting the speaker impedance
■ Connecting speakers
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting
6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also
use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
1
Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.
2
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press
MAIN ZONE z.
MAIN ZONE z
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the
speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the
unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,
“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
Speakers to be connected
STRAIGHT
Room
3
Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
4
5
SPEAKERIMP.
8MIN
Speaker system
(the number of channels)
Speaker type
Abbr.
7+2
7
5
2
Front (L)
1
●
●
●
●
Front (R)
2
●
●
●
●
Center
3
●
●
●
Surround (L)
4
●
●
*3
Surround (R)
5
●
●
*3
Surround
back (L)
6
●
*1
Surround
back (R)
7
●
*1
Front
presence (L)
E
●
*2
*4
Front
presence (R)
R
●
*2
*4
Power Amp
Assign
(p.103)
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.
You are now ready to connect the speakers.
Main zone
Basic (default)
If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front
presence speakers (*2).
If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence
speakers (*4).
• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.
• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an
external power amplifier” (p.24).
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers
En
18
1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)
❑ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the
unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire
to the positive terminal.
+
–
+
–
Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and
twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
Connection diagram
Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.
U
C
U
ZONE OUT
CENTER
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the
terminal.
1
d Tighten the terminal.
2
The unit (rear)
ROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP EXTRA SP
L
+ (red)
+
b
FR
c
ON
T
-
a
d
SINGLE
– (black)
Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
Q
W
1
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
a
2
Banana plug
9
3
9
4
5
+
FR
ON
T
b
❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
6
7
Audio pin cable
PRE
OUT
(SING
LE)
1
2
SURR
UND
SUR.
BA
CK
SUBW
OOFE
R
CENT
ER
CENT
ER
FRO
NT
• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers
En
19
1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Advanced speaker configuration
In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.16), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.
Using the four internal
amplifiers for front speakers to
have more high-quality sounds
Bi-amp connection
Combining with an external
power amplifier (Hi-Fi
amplifier, etc.) to build an
extended system
Using the excess internal
amplifiers for stereo speakers
in another room
Power-amp channel expansion
(Example)
Multi-zone configuration
(Example)
(Example)
External power
amplifier
Bi-amp
connection
Zone2
Main zone
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers
En
20
1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
■ Available speaker configurations
❑ 5ch BI-AMP
Main zone
Output
channel
(max)
Bi-amp
5

7

7
Bi-amp
External
power
amplifier
(required)
Multi-zone
Surround
back
+1 (Zone2)
Power Amp Assign
(p.103)
Page
5ch BI-AMP
21
5ch BI-AMP +SB
22
7ch +1ZONE
22
1
2
3
9
4
9
5
• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.103)
in the “Setup” menu.
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
67
(not used)
ER
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1–2
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers
En
21
1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB
❑ 7ch +1ZONE
Bi-amp
1
9
1
2
3
9
9
4
1
5
6
7
2
9
3
4
5
6
2
7
Zone2
Main zone
via external amp
Speaker
Connect to
Speaker
Connect to
12
FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)
12
FRONT
3
CENTER
3
CENTER
45
SURROUND
45
SURROUND
67
SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier
67
SURROUND BACK
ER
(not used)
ER
(not used)
9
SUBWOOFER 1–2
9
SUBWOOFER 1–2
Zone2 speakers
EXTRA SP
• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.84), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers
En
22
1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections
■ Connecting Zone2 speakers
When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the
FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals.
When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals.
To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.103) in the
“Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp
Assign” setting (p.103) in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC
wall outlet.
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP EXTRA SP
R
L
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
1
1
9
2
2
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP EXTRA SP
L
3
FL
9
FR
9
4
3
4
R
SINGLE
SINGLE
9
CENTER
L
5
6
7
Zone2
5
Main zone
• You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.81).
• The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals.
Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp
connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker
cables.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers
En
23
1 Speaker connections 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
■ Connecting an external power amplifier
When connecting an external power amplifier (pre-main amplifier) to enhance speaker
output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit.
The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
(Example)
Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier
PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks
RS-232C
4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
Main input jack
TRIGGER
OUT
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR
Caution
1
REMOTE
IN
OUT
• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making
connections.
– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.
(SINGLE)
0.1A
1
L
L
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
R
SPEAKERS
SURROUND BACK
L
CENTER
– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS
terminals.
– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of
the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to
the pre-main amplifier.
MAIN IN
PR
2
12V
PRE OUT
R
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP EXTRA SP
FRONT
R
AC IN
L
Amplifier with
volume control
bypass
(such as A-S2000)
SUR
SINGLE
The unit (rear)
The unit (rear)
HDMI
3
C
RS-232C
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
Y
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR
1
REMOTE
IN
OUT
2
D
12V
ZONE OUT
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
0.1A
1
2
ZONE 2
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP EXTRA SP
AC IN
L
SINGLE
1 23
4
1 FRONT jacks
Output front channel sounds.
2 SURROUND jacks
Output surround channel sounds.
3 SUR. BACK jacks
About external power amplifiers
We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.
• With unbalanced inputs
• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)
• Output power: about 100 W (6 to 8 )
Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect
the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).
4 CENTER jack
Outputs center channel sounds.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers
En
24
Input/output jacks and cables
■ Video/audio jacks
■ Video jacks
■ Audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.
Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),
and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.
AV 1
HDMI cable
Digital optical cable
EN
PON
COM
Component video cable
AV 1
A
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
❑ COAXIAL jacks
❑ S VIDEO jack
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission features.
• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.
Transmits S-video signals that include luminance (Y)
and chrominance (C) components. Use an S-video
cable.
❑ HDMI/MHL jack
Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.
Digital coaxial cable
S-video cable
❑ AUDIO jacks
Transmits digital video and digital sound. Use an MHL
cable.
Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable (RCA cable).
MHL cable
❑ VIDEO jacks
Stereo pin cable
Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.
AV 1
Video pin cable
• The VIDEO AUX jack on the front panel of the unit supports both
HDMI and MHL connections. Use a cable that matches the jack on
your MHL-compatible mobile device. When connecting an
HDMI-compatible playback device to the VIDEO AUX jack, use an
HDMI cable. For details on an MHL connection, see “MHL
connection” (p.35).
PREPARATIONS ➤
Input/output jacks and cables
En
25
1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2 Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
■ Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.
The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks
available on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.
Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?
Yes
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.109) in the “Setup” menu.
• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
■ Connection Method 1 (p.26)
• Use an HDMI cable that supports ARC.
HDMI OUT 1 jack
No
HDMI OUT
1
Does your TV support
HDMI Control?
Yes
■ Connection Method 2 (p.28)
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
2
ARC
The unit (rear)
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
1
2
ARC
PHONO
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
AV 1
(1 BD/D
HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)
PB
AV 1
HDMI
A
No
GND
ARC
AV 2
B
Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack?
Yes
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO 3
HDMI
AUDIO 4
R
■ Connection Method 3 (p.29)
No
■ Connection Method 4 (p.30)
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
4 OPTICAL
FRONT
(4 RADIO)
AM
TV
About HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback
devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the
unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.141).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.140).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).
About Audio Return Channel (ARC)
ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a
TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV
En
26
1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.
3
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)
and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.
b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
c Press ON SCREEN.
ON
SCREEN
RETURN
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
OPTION
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
e Check the following.
DISPLAY
d Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu is set
to “On”.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio
cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28).
e Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
g Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
h Press ON SCREEN.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV
En
27
1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)
❑ Necessary settings
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.109) in the “Setup” menu.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.
1
After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and
playback devices.
2
Configure the settings of the unit.
• HDMI Control is available only on the HDMI OUT 1 jack.
HDMI OUT 1 jack
a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
HDMI OUT
1
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
2
ARC
The unit (rear)
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
1
2
ARC
PHONO
AV 1
AV 2
b Press ON SCREEN.
HDMI
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
AV 1
HDMI input
(1 BD/D
PB
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
AV 1
HDMI
A
GND
ENTER
AV 2
B
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO 3
HDMI
AUDIO 4
RETURN
R
AUDIO 1
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
4 OPTICAL
(2 TV)
DISPLAY
AUDIO
FRONT
c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
L
L
L
R
R
(4 RADIO)
R
AM
TV
5 OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks
O
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.140).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.
f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.
g Press ON SCREEN.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV
En
28
1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3
Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).
■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or
stereo pin cable).
HDMI OUT 1 jack
b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.
HDMI OUT
c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
1
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
e Check the following.
(ZONE OUT)
HDMI
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
1
2
ARC
PHONO
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
NETWORK
2
ARC
The unit (rear)
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
AV 1
HDMI input
(1 BD/D
PB
AV 1
HDMI
A
GND
AV 2
B
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO 3
HDMI
AUDIO 4
R
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
AUDIO 1
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
ANTENNA
This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
4 OPTICAL
(2 TV)
AUDIO
FRONT
L
L
L
R
R
(4 RADIO)
R
AM
TV
5 OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1
jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.109) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use
the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks
O
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the
remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, any video input to the unit can be output to the TV,
regardless of the method used to connect the video device to the unit. For details, see “Video signal flow”
(p.140).
• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4
jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.31).
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV
En
29
1 2 TV connection 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)
❑ S VIDEO connection (with an S-video cable)
Depending on the video input jacks available on your TV, choose one of the following
connections.
If you select “AUDIO 1” as the input source by pressing AUDIO 1 or SCENE(TV) on the
remote control, the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
MONITOR OUT (S VIDEO) jack
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
The unit (rear)
Video input (S-video)
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
1
2
(ZONE OUT)
ARC
PHONO
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
S
AV 1
A
S
GND
AV 2
• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
B
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
AUDIO
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
R
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
5 OPTICAL
L
6 COAXIAL
L
L
R
R
R
ANTENNA
• If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, connect the TV to one of the AUDIO 2–4
jacks. To use the SCENE function (p.50), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
(4 RADIO)
AM
TV
5 OPTICAL
❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
OPTICAL
O
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
Y
The unit (rear)
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR
O
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks
PR
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
PB
HDMI
HDMI OUT
1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
A
(1 BD/DVD)
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
AV 1
2
ARC
Y
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
PB
C
❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)
Y
PR
AV 1
A
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
Y
PB
PR
Video input
(component video)
REM
IN
AV 2
B
D
AV 4
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
ZONE OUT
CENTER
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
COMPONENT VIDEO
5 OPTICAL
FRONT
6 COAXIAL
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
PR
SUR. BACK
Y
PB
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
The unit (rear)
PR
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
1
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
2
ARC
CE
Video input (S-video)
V
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
(ZONE OUT)
PB
PHONO
Y
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
AV 1
A
V
GND
AV 2
AUDIO
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
B
AUDIO 1
L
(2 TV)
L
L
SINGLE
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 4
(2 TV)
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
5 OPTICAL
L
6 COAXIAL
R
R
AUDIO
AUDIO 1
R
L
AUDIO 3
L
L
R
R
R
R
TV
5 OPTICAL
OPTICAL
O
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
(4 RADIO)
AM
TV
5 OPTICAL
O
OPTICAL
O
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
AUDIO 1
(OPTICAL or AUDIO)
jacks
O
Audio output
(digital optical or analog stereo)
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV
En
30
1 2 TV connection 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9
■ Connecting another TV or a projector
The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit
with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching
videos with the remote control (p.49).
HDMI OUT 2 jack
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
2
ARC
HDMI
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
• Connecting a USB storage device (p.69)
Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
2
ARC
AV 1
TV
(ZONE OUT)
1
PHONO
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
• Connecting an iPod (p.65)
HDMI OUT
1
The unit (rear)
3 Connecting playback devices
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
AV 1
(1 BD/D
PB
AV 1
A
GND
AV 2
B
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
HDMI
R
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
HDMI input
FRONT
HDMI
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.
(4 RADIO)
AM
• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than
HDMI.
TV (already connected)
Projector
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.114) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ,
D ), COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL (c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.
• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for
Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.82).
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.90) in the “Option” menu.
■ HDMI connection
Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.
HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks
The unit (rear)
HDMI
2
OUT)
Y
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
PB
C
TRIG
OU
PR
Y
MULTI CH INPUT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
D
AV 4
AUDIO 4
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR
12V
ZONE OUT
CENTER
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
HDMI output
HDMI
1
HDMI
2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
HDMI
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
SINGLE
Video device
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices
En
31
1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9
■ Component video connection
■ S-video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the
unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
Connect a video device to the unit with an S-video cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
Output jacks on video device
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Input jacks on the unit
Audio
Component video
Video
Digital coaxial
AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1–4 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)
AV 1–4
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks
S-video
The unit (rear)
PB
PR
Digital coaxial
AV 1–2 (S VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3–4 (S VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1–4 (S VIDEO + AUDIO)
The unit (rear)
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
Y
Audio
PR
PHONO
NETWORK
AV 1
AV 2
AV 1–4
(S VIDEO) jacks
( 3 NET )
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
AV OUT
Video output
(S-video)
PB
GND
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
1
2
(ZONE OUT)
ARC
PHONO
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
Y
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
S
(1 BD/DVD)
L
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
PB
C
PR
R
AV 1
A
Video output
(component video)
GND
AV 2
B
D
AV 4
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
R
PR
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
R
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
S
4 OPTICAL
S VIDEO
ZONE
CENTER
Y
PB
PR
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
(4 RADIO)
AM
ZONE 2
PB
L
C
C
Y
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
COAXIAL
(4 RADIO)
AM
O
C
C
L
COAXIAL
O
Video device
L
L
R
R
OPTICAL
O
L
L
L
R
R
R
OPTICAL
R
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Video device
O
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices
En
32
1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9
■ Composite video connection
Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.
Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.
Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the
following connections.
Output jacks on video device
Input jacks on the unit
Video
Audio
Composite video
Digital coaxial
AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3–4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)
• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”
setting (p.114) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (a, b, f) and OPTICAL
(c, d, e) jacks to another input source.
• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit
will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.90) in the “Option” menu.
The unit (rear)
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
PHONO
NETWORK
AV 1
AV 2
AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks
Audio output jacks on audio device
Audio output jacks on the unit
Digital coaxial
AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)
AUDIO 2 (COAXIAL)
Digital optical
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL)
AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL)
Analog stereo
AV 1–4 (AUDIO)
AUDIO 1–4 (AUDIO)
Turntable (PHONO)
PHONO
( 3 NET )
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
AV OUT
Video output
(composite video)
V
GND
L
VIDEO
R
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
V
4 OPTICAL
(4 RADIO)
AM
C
C
COAXIAL
O
Video device
O
L
L
L
R
R
OPTICAL
R
Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),
AV 3–4 (OPTICAL),
AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio
played back on the video device will be output from the unit.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices
En
33
1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9
Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
PHONO jacks
PHONO
Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.
Audio output
(PHONO)
Ground lead
GND
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit.
The unit
(rear)
PHONO
L
L
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
L
( 3 NET )
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
AV OUT
AV 1
2
ARC
(1 BD/
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
R
❑ HDMI connection
L
HDMI OUT
1
R
PHONO
Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see
“Connecting an iPod” (p.65) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.69).
GND
Y
R
PB
Turntable
R
AV 1
A
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the
unit with an HDMI cable.
GND
AV 2
B
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
AUDIO 4
FM
AM
TUNING
ENTER
ZONE 2
RETURN
R
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
YPAO MIC
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
5 OPTICAL
FRONT
6 COAXIAL
SILENT CINEMA
5V
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
2.1A
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
HDMI/
MHL 5V
1A
(4 RADIO)
AM
HDMI
C
C
COAXIAL
O
The unit (front)
Audio device
O
L
L
L
R
R
OPTICAL
R
Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4
(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks
Audio output
(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,
analog stereo)
Game console
If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4 or PHONO on the remote
control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.
When connecting a turntable
• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a
low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.
• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.
Camcorder
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the
video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI
OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29).
• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.
• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX jacks are output from
the HDMI OUT and MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jacks by default. You can change the video out setting in
“Video Out” (p.93) in the “Input” menu.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices
En
34
1 2 3 Playback device connections 4 5 6 7 8 9
❑ MHL connection
❑ Composite video/analog stereo/digital optical connection
Connect an MHL-compatible mobile device (such as smartphones) to the unit with an
MHL cable. You can enjoy full HD videos and multichannel audio sources stored on the
mobile device. The VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack of the unit enables you to input
videos and audio directly from the mobile device to the unit.
Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a
video pin cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable).
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
FM
ZONE 2
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
MULTI ZONE
PROGRAM
FM
AM
TUNING
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
TUNING
YPAO MIC
ENTER
SILENT CINEMA
ZONE 2
RETURN
AM
ENTER
RETURN
ZONE CONTROL
DISPLAY
5V
2.1A
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
R
O
HDMI/
MHL 5V
1A
VIDEO AUX
PHONES
YPAO MIC
SILENT CINEMA
5V
2.1A
VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
OPTICAL
V
HDMI/
MHL 5V
1A
L
The unit (front)
MHL
The unit (front)
MHL output
MHL
Game console
Mobile device
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the mobile device will be output from the unit.
Camcorder
• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI
OUT jack of the unit (p.26 to 29).
• You need to prepare an MHL cable that matches the jack on your mobile device.
If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.
• If you cannot hear sounds played on the mobile device, check the volume of the mobile device.
• You can operate the mobile device using the menu operation keys, external device operation keys and
numeric keys on the remote control. However, some features may not be compatible, depending on the
mobile device or its application. In this case, operate the mobile device itself.
• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL IN) jack and VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO/AUDIO/OPTICAL) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI/MHL
IN) jack.
• If “Standby Through” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, you can output mobile device videos/audio
to the TV or operate the mobile device using the remote control of the unit even when the unit is in standby
mode.
• The unit supplies power to the mobile device in the following conditions.
– The unit is turned on.
– The unit is in standby mode while “Standby Through” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices
En
35
1 2 3 4 FM/AM antenna connections 5 6 7 8 9
4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Assembling the AM antenna
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
• The location of the antenna jacks varies depending on the region of purchase.
FM antenna
AM antenna
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
1
2
ARC
PHONO
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
HDMI
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
(1 BD/DVD)
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
PB
C
PR
AV 1
A
Y
GND
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR
Connecting the AM antenna
AV 2
B
D
AV 4
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
ZONE OUT
CENTER
PRE OUT
(SI
SURROUND
SUR
Hold down
R
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
FRONT
Insert
Release
SPEAKERS
R
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
(4 RADIO)
AM
SINGLE
The unit (rear)
• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas
En
36
1 2 3 4 5 Network connections 6 Other connections 7 8 9
5 Connecting to a network
6 Connecting other devices
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.
Internet
Connecting recording devices
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output video/audio signals selected as the input.
Network Attached Storage
(NAS)
• The AV OUT jacks cannot output video/audio signals input through the HDMI or COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks.
WAN
• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.
PC
LAN
AV OUT jacks
Modem
Video/audio input
VIDEO
AV OUT
The unit (rear)
V
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
1
2
ARC
Router
PHONO
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
V
S VIDEO
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
S
Y
S
AV 1
A
Network cable
GND
AV 2
B
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
L
Mobile device
(such as iPhone)
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
1
2
ARC
PHONO
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO
AUDIO 4
HDMI
Y
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
R
L
L
R
R
L
(1 BD/DVD)
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y AV 3
PR
PB
C
1 COAXIAL
PR
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
AV 1
A
MO
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
Y
GND
R
Video/audio
recording device
AV 2
B
D
AV 4
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
ANTENNA
ZONE OUT
CENTER
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
(4 RADIO)
AM
OPTICAL
R
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
R
The unit (rear)
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND
ZONE 2
O
L
O
R
(4 RADIO)
AM
• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.110).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Network” (p.118) in the “Information” menu.
• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.
• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network
En
37
1 2 3 4 5 6 Other connections 7 8 9
Connecting a device with analog multi-channel output
Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function
You can connect an analog multi-channel output device such as a DVD player and an
SACD player to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the
unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the
trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks.
The unit (rear)
ORK
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
1
2
ARC
AV 3
AV 4
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
TRIGGER OUT
1–2 jacks
(1 BD/DVD)
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
PB
C
P
AV 1
A
The unit (rear)
AV 2
TRIGGER
OUT
B
D
AV 4
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
RS-232C
AV 6
AV 7
1
TRIGGER
OUT
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
5 OPTICAL
FRONT
6 COAXIAL
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
Radio
1
REMOTE
R
SURROUND
OUT
L
MULTI CH INPUT
ENNA
ZON
CENTER
(4 RADIO)
AM
2
2
Channel output
(Center)
12V
LE)
0.1A
12V
0.1A
1
System connection
input
2
CK
(Subwoofer)
FRONT
MULTI CH
INPUT jacks
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP EXTRA SP
AC IN
L
SUBWOOFER
L
(Surround
back)
R
L
(Surround)
Device with analog
multi-channel output
Yamaha subwoofer that
supports a system connection
R
L
(Front)
• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.115) in the
“Setup” menu.
R
If you select “MULTI CH” as the input source by pressing MULTI on the remote control,
the audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.
• You can select a video source to be displayed when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source using
“Video Out” (p.93) in the “Input” menu. When connecting a video device (such as a DVD player) to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks, use the input jack specified in “Video Out” for the video connection.
• Since the unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing
speakers, make appropriate settings on the external device (such as a DVD player) that suit to the speaker
configuration.
• When “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source, sound mode selection and tone control adjustment are
not available.
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting other devices
En
38
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Power cable connection 8 9
7 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.
• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.
The unit (rear)
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
RS-232C
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
220V240V
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE
OUT
PR
IN
OUT
110V120V
2
12V
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
0.1A
1
2
CK
L
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP EXTRA SP
AC IN
L
SINGLE
After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit
and then to an AC wall outlet.
The unit (rear)
RS-232C
AV 6
AV 7
TRIGGER
OUT
1
REMOTE
OUT
2
12V
LE)
0.1A
1
2
CK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP EXTRA SP
AC IN
L
To an AC wall outlet
PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the power cable
En
39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Language setting 9
RECEIVER
SOURCE
RECEIVER z
8 Selecting an on-screen menu language
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and
Chinese.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
TUNER
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
1
2
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
3
4
Press ON SCREEN.
5
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and
the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired
language.
OPTION
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
6
7
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press
ENTER.
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
8
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language
En
40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup
RECEIVER
SOURCE
RECEIVER z
9 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.
4
According to your speaker configuration, configure
the “Power Amp Assign” setting (p.103) in the
“Setup” menu.
For the basic speaker configuration (p.16): set to “Basic”
(default).
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
5
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
For any of the advanced speaker configurations (p.20): set
to the appropriate setting.
• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)
technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically
designed for acoustic perfection.
• Please note the following when using YPAO.
– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function
at night when it may be a nuisance to others.
ENTER
RETURN
Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position (same height as your ears) and connect it
to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
YPAO MIC
jack
The unit (front)
YPAO MIC
DISPLAY
– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.
BAND
– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
MODE
TUNING
– Do not connect headphones.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
5
6
9
0
3
7
4
8
MEMORY
10
1
2
ENT
Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
1
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
3
Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
VOLUME
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
9
4
2
3
YPAO
5
microphone
9
Ear height
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
Place the YPAO microphone at
your listening position (same height
as your ears). We recommend the
use of a tripod as a microphone
stand. You can use the tripod
screws to stabilize the microphone.
PREPARATIONS ➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En
41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup
The following screen appears on the TV.
RECEIVER
SOURCE
RECEIVER
• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to
enjoy surround sound in a wider space.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening
position you will be seated most frequently.
AUDIO
Single measure
Multi measure
(5 listening positions)
TUNER
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting
the measurement.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
6
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
a
If desired, change the measuring method
(multi/single).
e
bac
a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.
Multi measure
Multi measure
(1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back)
BAND
MODE
TUNING
d
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
8
MEMORY
10
ENT
b
c a e
d
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
Settings
Yes
No (default)
Select this option if you will have several listening
positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.
You can take measurements at up to 8 different
positions in the room. The speaker settings will be
optimized to suit the area defined by those positions
(multi measure).
Select this option if your listening position will always be
fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The
speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position
(single measure).
c
a b
d
This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the
measurement.
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:
“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.44)
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:
“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.43)
• If the cursor keys do not work, the remote control may be set to operate
external devices. In this case, press RECEIVER and then use the cursor keys.
PREPARATIONS ➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En
42
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
Measuring at one listening position
(single measure)
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
3
To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 3 minutes).
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
1
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
OPTION
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
7
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
4
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
4
Caution
8
MEMORY
10
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.47) or “Warning messages” (p.48).
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.45).
PREPARATIONS ➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En
43
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup
Measuring at multiple listening positions
(multi measure)
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
3
When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for
measurement.
AUDIO
When the measurements at the positions you want
to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to
select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.
When you have taken measurements at 8 listening
positions, the following screen appears automatically.
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,
see “Error messages” (p.47) or “Warning messages” (p.48).
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.
1
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER
again to start the measurement immediately.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see
“Checking the measurement results” (p.45).
• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement at the first position finishes.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Measure” and press ENTER.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and
press ENTER.
5
To save the measurement result, use the cursor
keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
2
Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening
position and press ENTER.
Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions
(up to 8) have been taken.
The adjusted speaker settings are applied.
• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
PREPARATIONS ➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En
44
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup
6
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.
2
This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
Wiring
Polarity of each speaker
Normal: The speaker cable is connected with the
correct polarity (+/-).
Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the
reverse polarity (+/-).
Size
Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the
subwoofer)
Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively.
You can check the YPAO measurement results.
Distance
Distance from the listening position to each speaker
1
Level
Output level adjustment for each speaker
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Caution
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
Checking the measurement results
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Use the cursor keys to select an item.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
After the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Result” and press ENTER.
• A speaker with a problem is indicated with a message enclosed in a red box.
• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.101) in the “Setup” menu,
which displays the previous measurement results.
3
The following screen appears.
PRESET
To finish checking the results and return to the
previous screen, press RETURN.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
8
MEMORY
10
ENT
1
TV
2
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
3
1 Measurement result items
2 Measurement result details
3 The number of measured positions (when multi
measure is performed)
PREPARATIONS ➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En
45
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup
Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not
suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings
and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.
AUDIO
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto
Setup”, and then “Result” (p.100).
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and
press ENTER.
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
1
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
7
4
8
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
PREPARATIONS ➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En
46
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup
Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.
Error message
Cause
E-1: No Front SP
Front speakers are not detected.
E-2: No Sur. SP
One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.
E-3: No F.PRNS SP
One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.
E-4: SBR → SBL
A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.
When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the
on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.
E-5: Noisy
The noise is too loud.
Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.
E-6: Check Sur.
Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround
speakers are connected.
Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen
instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.
E-7: No MIC
The YPAO microphone has been removed.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again.
E-8: No Signal
The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.
Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the
measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service
center.
E-9: User Cancel
The measurement has been canceled.
Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.
An internal error has occurred.
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact
the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
E-10: Internal Error
Remedy
Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.
PREPARATIONS ➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En
47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Automatic speaker setup
Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.
Warning message
Cause
Remedy
W-1: Out of Phase
A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity
(+/-).
Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.45) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by
“Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly, turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are
connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.
W-2: Over Distance
A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening
position.
Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.45) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80
ft) of the listening position.
W-3: Level Error
There are significant volume differences between the
speakers.
Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the
subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as
possible.
PREPARATIONS ➤
Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)
En
48
PLAYBACK
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
AUDIO
Input selection keys
TUNER
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
Basic playback procedure
1
Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.
2
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
3
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
MUTE
VOLUME
ON SCREEN
Selecting an HDMI output jack
1
Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.
Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be
used for signal output changes.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
ON
SCREEN
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58)
BAND
MODE
TUNING
• Playing back iPod music (p.65)
PRESET
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.69)
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.72)
MEMORY
9
10
0
ENT
• Listening to Internet radio (p.75)
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
OPTION
ENTER
HDMIOUTSel.
OUT1+2
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.77)
TV CH
CODE SET
4
OUT 1+2
Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.
OUT 1
Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.
OUT 2
Off
Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.
• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.50).
• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest
resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For
example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p
TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)
• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113)), you
can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.
Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.
• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.
• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or
TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.88).
On-screen input selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and
press ENTER.
PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure
En
49
Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.
You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
1
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
SCENE
Press SCENE.
The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.
By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
SCENE (SCENE key)
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
HDMI Output
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
2 (TV)
3 (NET)
4 (RADIO)
Input (p.49)
AV 1
AUDIO 1
NET RADIO
TUNER
Audio Select (p.90)
Auto
Auto
—
—
HDMI Output (p.49)
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
OUT 1+2
Sound Program (p.52)
Sci-Fi
STRAIGHT
7ch Stereo
7ch Stereo
Pure Direct Mode (p.107)
Auto
Auto
Auto
Auto
Enhancer (p.57)
Off
On
On
On
Input
OPTION
ENTER
1 (BD/DVD)
Mode
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
9
10
0
ENT
• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.
Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes
from the “Scene” menu (p.94).
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
On-screen scene selection
a Press ON SCREEN.
b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press
ENTER.
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
En
50
SOURCE
RECEIVER
SOURCE
Configuring scene assignments
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
ZONE 2
Set the unit to the condition (such as input source
and sound program) that you want to assign to a
scene.
2
Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
Input selection keys
TUNER
MAIN
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output
and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the
scene assignments in “Detail” (p.96) in the “Scene” menu.
Sound
Tone Control, Adaptive DRC
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue
Level, Subwoofer Trim, Extended Surround
Video
Video Mode
Volume
Master Volume
Lipsync
Lipsync, Delay
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern, PEQ Select
SCENE
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Selecting setting items to be included as
scene assignments
HD 3
3
SCENE1
SETComplete
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
7
8
MEMORY
9
10
0
ENT
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.124) to register it.
• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external
device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify
the device type in “Device Control” (p.95) in the “Scene” menu.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)
En
51
Selecting the sound mode
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies
• Press MOVIE repeatedly.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
PROGRAM
ON SCREEN
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
7
4
8
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
TV VOL
c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround
decoder and press ENTER.
MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM.
• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in
the “Sound Program” menu (p.97).
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening
music sources or stereo playback (p.55).
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz, the
straight decode mode (p.56) is automatically selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.10) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in
the “Information” menu (p.117).
• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from
2-channel sources (p.56).
❑ Switching to the straight decode mode
• Press STRAIGHT.
INPUT
MUTE
b Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press
ENTER.
• Press MUSIC repeatedly.
❑ Selecting a surround decoder
BAND
MOVIE
❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or
stereo playback
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
a Press ON SCREEN.
This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing
video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.54).
OPTION
ENTER
On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection
TV CH
CODE SET
This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels
(p.56).
❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode
• Press PURE DIRECT.
This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the
electrical noise from other circuitry (p.57).
❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer
• Press ENHANCER.
This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth
and breadth (p.57).
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode
En
52
Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize
Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you
to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert
halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields.
You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel
speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.
Sound program category
MUSIC
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
3
CLASSICAL
HallinVienna
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
“CINEMA DSP n” lights up
Sound program
• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.88) in the
“Option” menu to “Off”.
• We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full
effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no front presence
speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using
the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields.
■ Enjoying sound field effects without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit
utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce
up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the
well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We
recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more
effective stereoscopic sound field.
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode
En
53
■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
❑ ENTERTAINMENT
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.
Sports
This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.
Action Game
This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.
Roleplaying Game
This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.
Music Video
This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
❑ MOVIE THEATER
Standard
This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.
Spectacle
This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.
Drama
This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.
Mono Movie
This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode
En
54
■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.
❑ CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich
This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.
❑ LIVE/CLUB
Cellar Club
This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.
The Bottom Line
This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
❑ STEREO
2ch Stereo
Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).
7ch Stereo
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.
• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.53) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is
selected.
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode
En
55
Enjoying unprocessed playback
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
1
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press STRAIGHT.
For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.137).
1
Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.
HD 3
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.
OPTION
The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)
SUR.DECODE
ProLogic
bPro Logic
ENTER
RETURN
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
DISPLAY
HD 3
STRAIGHT
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
BAND
MODE
TUNING
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
7
4
bPLII Music
INPUT
TV VOL
• To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.89) in the “Option” menu to a
setting other than “Off”.
bPLIIx Game
Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for movies.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for music.
bPLII Game
Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic II decoder) suitable for games.
Neo:6 Cinema
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music
Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder suitable for music.
ENT
TV
MUTE
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
8
MEMORY
10
bPLII Movie
bPLIIx Music
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
bPLIIx Movie
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
TV CH
CODE SET
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” (p.104) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“None”.
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode
En
56
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.
AUDIO
1
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is
enabled or disabled.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Press PURE DIRECT.
HD
TOP MENU
PUREDIRECT
3
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.
ENTER
– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs
RETURN
DISPLAY
– Operating the on-screen and “Option” menus
BAND
– Using the multi-zone function
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
4
Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD
EnhancerOn
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
3
“ENHANCER” lights up
ENHANCER
PURE DIRECT
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling
rate is over 48 kHz.
8
MEMORY
10
1
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.
– Output from the AV OUT jacks
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)
ENT
TV
• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.90) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode
En
57
Listening to FM/AM radio
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
TUNER
TUNER
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
Setting the frequency steps
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
Selecting a frequency for reception
FM87.50MHz
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
HD 3
(Asia and General models only)
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
TUNING
1
2
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press MAIN ZONE z.
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
Set the unit to standby mode.
MAIN ZONE z
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
7
STRAIGHT
Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
HD 3
FM98.50MHz
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
4
8
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.
Numeric keys
MEMORY
10
3
ENT
TV
“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
PROGRAM
3
Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ
STEP”.
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
HD 3
4
5
TUNERFRQSTEP
FM50/AM9
Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby
mode and turn it on again.
• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.
• (U.S.A. model only)
You can switch between “Auto” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio
reception in “Audio Mode” (p.90) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it. (HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the
monaural reception mode.)
• (Except for U.S.A. model)
You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.91) in the “Option” menu. When the signal
reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may
improve it.
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio
En
58
Registering favorite radio stations (presets)
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.
AUDIO
TUNER
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals and HD
Radio stations (U.S.A. model only) by using “Auto Preset” (p.62, p.64).
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.
TOP MENU
1
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.
You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.
■ Registering a radio station
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
■ Selecting a preset station
Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.58)
to tune into the desired radio station.
Preset
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
HD 3
01:FM98.50MHz
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
OPTION
• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.
ENTER
RETURN
• (U.S.A. model only)
To register a specific HD Radio program, select an audio program (p.60)
after tuning into the radio station.
DISPLAY
BAND
• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
4
8
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
Numeric keys
MEMORY
2
Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.62, p.64).
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
TV CH
CODE SET
Preset number
Preset
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
HD 3
01:FM98.50MHz
PresetOK
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a
preset number, and then press MEMORY again.
“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered
Preset
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
HD 3
02:Empty
FM98.50MHz
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio
En
59
RECEIVER
SOURCE
HD Radio™ tuning
■ Selecting an HD Radio™ audio program
(U.S.A. model only)
You can select an audio program when the unit is tuned into an HD
Radio station that provides multiple audio programs (up to 8).
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
HD Radio Technology is a new technology that enables FM/AM
radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting
provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and
reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental
program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio
programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further
information on HD Radio Technology, visit
“http://www.ibiquity.com/”.
AUDIO
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
The unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating
CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM
broadcasts. In addition, the unit can receive both audio and data
(such as song titles, artist names, album titles and program types)
from all HD Radio programs (HD1 to HD8).
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
RETURN
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Program Service Data: Contributes to the superior user experience
PRESET
Adjacent to traditional main stations are extra local FM channels.
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
5
6
3
4
7
8
MEMORY
9
These HD2/HD3 Channels provide new, original music as well as
deep cuts into traditional genre.
INFO
SLEEP
2
10
0
DOCK
TAG
HD
HD2/3
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
HD 3
FM88.9MHz3
WXYZ-FM
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
■ Displaying the HD Radio™ information
ENT
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the item switches.
of HD RadioTechnology. Presents song name, artist, station IDs,
HD2/HD3 Channel Guide, and other relevant data streams.
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
1
You can also enter an audio program number (1 to 8)
directly by using the numeric keys. For example, to select
program 3, press 3 and then ENT (or just leave it).
1
DISPLAY
MODE
INFO
Press MODE repeatedly to select a desired audio
program.
You can switch the HD Radio information displayed on the front display.
ENTER
MOVIE
1
DOCK
TAG
HD
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
HD 3
Digital, CD-quality sound. HD Radio Technology enables local radio
Info
Category
stations to broadcast a clean digital signal. AM sounds like today?s
FM and FM sounds like a CD.
Numeric keys
ENT
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Item name
About 3 seconds later, the information is displayed.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
When tuning into an HD Radio station
DOCK
TAG
HD
HD1/3
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
FM88.9MHz1
WXYZ-FM
“HD” lights up
FM88.9-1
TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
Relative/total program number
(when multiple programs are available)
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
DOCK
TAG
HD
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
HD 3
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Absolute program number
(when multiple programs are available)
WXYZ-FM
RhythmandBlu
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Station Info
Frequency, station name (call sign)
Category
Station name (call sign), program category
Artist/Song
Station name (call sign), artist name/song title
Album
Station name (call sign), album title
DSP Program
Frequency, sound program selected on the unit
Audio Decoder
Frequency, decoder selected on the unit
• The unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital FM/AM radio stations. If
you cannot search the desired all-digital HD Radio station by holding down
TUNING, enter the frequency directly using the numeric keys.
• When the unit is in the monaural reception mode (p.90), you can tune into the
analog part of a hybrid HD Radio station only.
• Some audio programs may not provide information depending on the station
or period of time.
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio
En
60
■ Holding HD Radio™ information display
RECEIVER
SOURCE
You can hold the HD Radio information currently displayed on the
TV (playback screen) and front display by using the hold function.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
TUNER
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
When the desired HD Radio information is
displayed, press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Hold/Unhold”
(Hold/Unhold) and press ENTER.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
7
8
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
• The hold function is automatically disabled if the unit is set to standby mode
or if another input source or another radio station is selected.
3
Menu
TV CH
Function
Switches to FM/AM.
AM
Tuning (+/-)
Selects a frequency.
Auto (+/-)
Selects a radio station automatically.
Program (+/-)
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
Selects an audio program (when
multiple audio programs are
available).
Memory
Registers the selected station as
presets.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
Direct
Enters a frequency directly.
You can view the HD Radio information or select a radio station on
the TV.
1
Submenu
FM
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Manual Tuning
4
MEMORY
10
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
5 Operation menu
• Texts in parentheses denote indications on the front display.
OPTION
Lights up when an HD Radio station signal is received.
4 TUNED/STEREO indicators
■ HD Radio™ operation on the TV
MODE
MUTE
The current information will remain displayed until
“Hold/Unhold” is selected again.
POP-UP/MENU
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
When tuning into an HD Radio station, the selected audio program
number and HD Radio information (station name [call sign], program
category, artist name, album name and song title) are also displayed.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 HD indicator
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
2 Radio station information
CODE SET
❑ Playback screen
1
2
3
4
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
5
1 HOLD indicator
Flashes when the hold function (p.61) is enabled.
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio
En
61
■ Browse screen
RECEIVER
SOURCE
Radio Data System tuning
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
(U.K. and Europe models only)
1
AUDIO
3
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
■ Displaying the Radio Data System information
1 Preset station list
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu
Submenu
Function
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
10
0
Auto Preset
Automatically registers HD Radio
(FM/AM) stations and FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset
Clear all the preset stations.
Utility
ENT
TV
TV VOL
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
HD 3
INPUT
MUTE
2
PRESET
MOVIE
9
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.64).
3 Operation menu
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
TUNING
1
2 Preset number
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.
TV CH
CODE SET
Info
ProgramType
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Item name
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
Frequency (always displayed)
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
• If HD Radio stations are detected by “Auto Preset”, only the audio program 1
(HD1) will be registered. If you want to register a specific HD Radio program,
register it manually (p.59).
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
HD 3
FM98.50MHz
CLASSICS
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Information
Program Service Program service name
Program Type
Current program type
Radio Text
Information on the current program
Clock Time
Current time
DSP Program
Sound mode name
Audio Decoder
Decoder name
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio
En
62
Operating the radio on the TV
RECEIVER
SOURCE
• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the
TV.
AUDIO
TUNER
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
■ Receiving traffic information
automatically
1
When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.
• (U.S.A. model only)
See “HD Radio™ operation on the TV” (p.61) to operate the radio on the TV.
1
Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
■ Playback screen
3
1
2
4
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.
• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
3
4
7
8
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
MEMORY
9
10
0
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.
1 Radio station information
Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected
band (FM/AM) and frequency.
TV CH
CODE SET
Finished
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
HD 3
TrafficProgram
TPFM101.30MHz
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Traffic information station (frequency)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.62), the
Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”
“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.
2 Band icon
(Except for U.K. and Europe models)
Select this icon and press ENTER to switch between FM and AM.
• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.
3 TUNED/STEREO indicators
“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.
“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.
4 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio
En
63
Menu
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
Submenu
Function
FM
AM
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Switches to FM/AM.
Tuning (+/-)
Selects a frequency.
Auto (+/-)
Selects a radio station automatically.
Memory
Registers the selected station as
presets.
Direct
Enters a frequency directly.
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
■ Browse screen
1
AUDIO
Manual Tuning
TUNER
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
Browse
Moves to the browse screen (preset
station list).
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
3
2
1 Preset station list
Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a
preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.
2 Preset number
3 Operation menu
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu
MODE
TUNING
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Submenu
Function
Memory
Registers the current station to the
preset number selected in the list.
Auto Preset
Automatically registers FM radio
stations with strong signals (up to 40
stations).
Clear Preset
Clear the preset station selected in the
list.
Clear All Preset
Clear all the preset stations.
PRESET
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
7
4
8
Utility
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
Moves to the previous/next page of the
list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows
the background. Press one of the
menu operation keys to redisplay it.
• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto
Preset”.
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio
En
64
Playing back iPod music
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.
Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.
• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,
depending on the model or software version of the iPod.
• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)
is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite
AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack on the front panel. To
select a video, operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.67).
Made for.
1
2
Connect the USB cable to the iPod.
Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.
The unit (front)
ON SCREEN
iPod touch (1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th generation)
OPTION
TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
ENTER
iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th 5th and 6th generation)
RETURN
DISPLAY
PHONES
YPAO MIC
iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
SILENT
iPad (3rd generation), iPad2, iPad
5V
2.1A
(as of April 2013)
DOCK
TAG
HD
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
USB
Connected
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If
“Network Standby” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
charge without limit.
• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music
En
65
Playback of iPod content
RECEIVER
SOURCE
■ Browse screen
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
AUDIO
You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
USB
TUNER
MAIN
PARTY
ZONE 2
1
2
3
Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.
1
5
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
HDMI OUT
4
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.68) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 List name
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
3 Contents list
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
4 Item number/total
MODE
TUNING
• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
MEMORY
10
ENT
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Menu
Function
1 Page Up
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
10 Pages Up
CODE SET
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.67).
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music
En
66
■ Playback screen
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)
1
2
AUDIO
1
Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.
3
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.
2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.68) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
2 Playback information
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.
Operational remote control
keys
Function
Cursor keys
Select an item.
ENTER
Confirms the selection.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
3 Operation menu
a
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
MODE
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
3
7
Menu
4
8
MEMORY
10
Submenu
Function
s
Stops playback.
f
a
Resumes playback from pause.
g
s
Stops playback.
h
d
Stops playback temporarily.
j
INPUT
TV VOL
Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.
ENT
TV
MUTE
External device
operation keys
d
TV CH
CODE SET
Play Control
Skips forward/backward.
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
f
g
h
j
Skips forward/backward.
Searches forward/backward (by holding
down).
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
• You can also use the external device operation keys on the remote control to
control playback.
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music
En
67
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
RECEIVER
SOURCE
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
BAND
MODE
MODE
TUNING
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Item
PRESET
Setting
Function
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
Songs (Songs)
Plays back songs in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Albums
(Albums)
Plays back albums in random order.
“x” appears in the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs repeatedly.
“v” appears in the TV screen.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
MEMORY
9
10
0
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
Repeat
(Repeat)
4
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music
En
68
Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage
device for more information.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
USB
• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.
• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.
The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC
files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer
of the USB storage device.
• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.
DISPLAY
• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use
extension cables.
Playback of USB storage device contents
• The unit does not support a USB hub.
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
Connecting a USB storage device
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.
1
1
ENTER
RETURN
• You cannot connect the PC to the USB jack of the unit.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
The unit (front)
3
7
ON SCREEN
4
OPTION
TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT
8
PROGRAM
ENTER
MEMORY
10
ENT
RETURN
DISPLAY
TV
PHONES
YPAO MIC
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
SILENT
TV CH
CODE SET
5V
2.1A
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.
USB storage device
DOCK
TAG
HD
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
USB
Connected
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En
69
2
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Browse screen
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
1
2
3
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
AUDIO
5
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
4
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
2 List name
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
3 Contents list
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys
(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
MUSIC
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Menu
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
Function
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En
70
■ Playback screen
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.
1
2
AUDIO
3
1
When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
OPTION
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
10
ENT
3
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu
Play Control
Submenu
Function
a
Resumes playback from pause.
s
Stops playback.
d
Stops playback temporarily.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Repeat
(Repeat)
TV
f
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
g
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Item
3 Operation menu
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
2 Playback information
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.71) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
Skips forward/backward.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
4
Setting
Function
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
En
71
Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
ZONE 2
• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router
(p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)
are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.118) in the “Information” menu.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files (1- or 2-channel audio only).
• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 192 kHz for WAV and FLAC
files, and 48 kHz for other files.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.
NET
TUNER
MAIN
Playback of PC music contents
You can play back music files stored on your PC or
DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.
AUDIO
You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.
1
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing
of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Media sharing setup
To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible
NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each
music server.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
7
4
8
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
■ For a PC with Windows Media Player
installed
1
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
TV CH
Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is
installed on your PC.
CODE SET
2
In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing
and allow media to be shared with the device.
• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.
2
Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.
■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server
software installed
Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and
configure the media sharing settings.
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En
72
3
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
■ Browse screen
1
2
3
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.
AUDIO
5
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
4
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
OPTION
3 Contents list
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.
• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden
files) during playback, playback stops automatically.
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
2 List name
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
MOVIE
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Menu
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
Function
1 Page Up
1 Page Down
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
10 Pages Down
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En
73
■ Playback screen
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Shuffle/repeat settings
You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC
music content.
1
2
AUDIO
3
1
When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.
2
Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
1 Status indicators
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
2 Playback information
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
OPTION
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu
10
ENT
Play Control
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
3
Submenu
Function
a
Resumes playback from pause.
s
Stops playback.
d
Stops playback temporarily.
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Repeat
(Repeat)
TV
f
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
g
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
Item
3 Operation menu
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
MEMORY
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.74) and playback status
(such as play/pause).
Skips forward/backward.
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
4
Setting
Function
Off (Off)
Turns off the shuffle function.
On (On)
Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order.
“x” appears on the TV screen.
Off (Off)
Turns off the repeat function.
One (One)
Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.
All (All)
Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly.
“v” appears on the TV screen.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.94).
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
En
74
Listening to Internet radio
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
NET
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.37). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.118) in the “Information” menu.
Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.
• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
8
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK ➤
Listening to Internet radio
En
75
■ Browse screen
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
■ Playback screen
1
2
3
AUDIO
1
2
3
5
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
4
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
1 Playback indicator
1 Playback indicator
2 List name
2 Playback information
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
ON
SCREEN
Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
3 Contents list
POP-UP/MENU
4 Item number/total
5 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
Menu
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
Menu
Submenu
Function
Play Control
s
Stops playback.
Function
Browse
Moves to the browse screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu
operation keys to redisplay it.
1 Page Up
3
4
7
8
Moves to the previous/next page of the list.
1 Page Down
MEMORY
9
10
0
ENT
TV
10 Pages Up
Moves 10 pages forward/backward.
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
10 Pages Down
Return
Returns to the higher-level list.
Now Playing
Moves to the playback screen.
Screen Off
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation keys
to redisplay it.
• You can also use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to
stop playback.
• Some information may not be available depending on the station.
• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by
selecting “NET RADIO” as the input source on the unit and then accessing the
following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this feature, you need
the unit’s vTuner ID and your e-mail address in order to create your personal
account. You can find the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in “Network” (p.118)
in the “Information” menu.
http://yradio.vtuner.com/
PLAYBACK ➤
Listening to Internet radio
En
76
Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on
the unit via network.
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music
contents on the unit.
iTunes
PC
1
Router
Starts playback
on iTunes
or iPod
The unit
Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or
display the playback screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon
(
) appears.
iTunes (example)
iPod (example)
Playback starts
iPod
• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same
router (p.37). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP
address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.118) in the “Information”
menu.
AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac
with OS X Mountain Lion, and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.
• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are
connected to the router properly.
2
(as of April 2013)
On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and
select the unit (network name of the unit) as the
audio output device.
iTunes (example)
iPod (example)
Network name of the unit
3
Select a song and start playback.
The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and
starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
En
77
Menu
RECEIVER
SOURCE
• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.
AV
1
2
5
3
6
4
7
• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu.
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.
• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable
volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.93) in the “Input” menu
to “Off”.
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
Play Control
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
a
Resumes playback from pause.
d
Stops playback temporarily.
f
Screen Off
Skips forward/backward.
Closes the screen display and shows the
background. Press one of the menu operation
keys to redisplay it.
Caution
• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Function
g
SCENE
1
Submenu
• You can also use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on
the remote control to control playback.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
Menu operation keys
Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
1
2
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
iTunes (example of English version)
3
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers
in advance.
■ Playback screen
4
8
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining
time.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.
Check this box
3 Operation menu
Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select
an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.
To close the submenu, press RETURN.
PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
En
78
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input
sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in
another room (Zone2).
■ Enjoying videos/music in another room
For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main
zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).
❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers
You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room.
• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you
connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
“Multi-zone output” (p.141).
Video
(ZONE OUT)
• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone
configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best
meet your requirements.
Audio
(SPEAKERS or
ZONE OUT)
Multi-zone configuration examples
Study room
(Zone2)
■ Enjoying music in another room
Living room (main zone)
Connections
TV (for analog video playback): p.81
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.81
You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room.
Audio
(SPEAKERS or
ZONE OUT)
• Analog video/audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network
sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in
Zone2, you need to connect the device to analog video/audio jacks of the unit.
Study room
(Zone2)
Living room (main zone)
Connections
Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.23
Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.81
• Analog audio sources (including FM/AM radio), and USB and network sources
can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of an external device in Zone2, you
need to connect the device to analog audio jacks of the unit.
PLAYBACK ➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En
79
❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV
Preparing Zone2
Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting
speakers or an external amplifier.
Video/audio
(HDMI)
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or
come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit
or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will
appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.
Study room
(Zone2)
■ Connecting speakers to play back audio
Living room (main zone)
Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection
method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or
an external amplifier).
Connection
TV: p.82
❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier
• Only HDMI video/audio sources can be output to Zone2. To enjoy the playback of
an external device in Zone2, you need to connect the device to an HDMI jack of
the unit.
Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker
cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.23).
PLAYBACK ➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En
80
❑ Using an external amplifier
Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in
Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to
the external amplifier.
The unit (rear)
HDMI
HDMI OUT
1
2
ARC
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
UT
Y
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
ZONE OUT
(ZONE 2) jacks
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
PB
C
PR
Y
MONITOR OUT/ZON
PB
ZONE OUT
AV 2
B
D
AV 4
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
ZONE OUT
CENTER
L
R
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2.
Depending on the video input jacks available on your video
monitor, choose one of the video connection methods.
• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2
video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video
monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the
video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player
via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR
OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.
AV 1
A
■ Connecting a video monitor to play back
analog videos
FRONT
SPEAKER
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND B
ZONE 2
External amplifier
Audio input
(analog stereo)
ZONE OUT jacks
(any of COMPONENT VIDEO, VIDEO, S VIDEO)
Y
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR
1
L
2
ARC
R
AV 1
Y
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
PB
AV 5
A
(1 BD/DVD)
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
UT
Video input
(any of component video,
composite video, S-video)
PR
HDMI
HDMI OUT
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
Y
PB
C
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
AV 1
A
Y
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR
Y
REM
PR
IN
PB
PR
AV 2
AUDIO
B
D
AV 4
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
PB
ZONE OUT
CENTER
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
Y
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
FRONT
SURROUND
V
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
VIDEO
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
CE
V
S
S VIDEO
SINGLE
Zone2
The unit (rear)
S
Main zone
Zone2
Main zone
To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video
monitor, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to
“Zone2”.
PLAYBACK ➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En
81
■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to
play back videos/audio
Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back
videos/audio at Zone2. If you connect an AV amplifier, you can
enjoy multi-channel playback in another room (Zone2).
• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the
following operations is performed.
– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input
– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source
– Changing the sound mode or audio settings (such as “Extended Surround”)
• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the
video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.31).
• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected
to the unit.
• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2.
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack
The unit (rear)
(Example: using a TV)
HDMI input
OUT
ETWORK
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
1
2
ARC
2
HDMI
2
AV 3
AV 4
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
AV
2
(ZONE
OUT)
AV 1
A
(1 BD/DVD)
PB
HDMI
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
HDMI
PB
AV 1
A
AV 2
B
AV 4
AUDIO 1
AUDIO 2
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
(2 TV)
AXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
R
ANTENNA
HD Radio
CENTER
SUBWOOFE
SURROUND
(4 RADIO)
AM
Zone2
(Example: using an AV amplifier)
HDMI input
HDMI
HDMI
Main zone
Zone2
To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI
OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.
PLAYBACK ➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En
82
■ Operating the unit from Zone2
(remote connection)
Remote connections between Yamaha products
You can operate the unit and external devices from Zone2 using the
supplied remote control if you connect an infrared signal
receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.
An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using
Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit
does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an
infrared signal receiver.
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
• To operate external devices with the supplied remote control, you must register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.123).
REMOTE
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
REMOTE
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
The unit (rear)
Infrared signal
receiver
HDMI
V1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
PB
C
Y
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR
REMOTE
REMOTE
IN
OUT
IN
D
AV 4
MULTI CH INPUT
ZONE OUT
CENTER
Yamaha products
(up to six, including the unit)
PR
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
OUT
1
2
RONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
FRONT
SUBWOOFER
Remote control
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
CENTER
R
FRO
Zone2
SINGLE
Infrared signal
transmitter
Infrared signal
receiver
External device
(such as a CD player)
Remote control
Zone2
Main zone
PLAYBACK ➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En
83
RECEIVER
SOURCE
RECEIVER z
Controlling Zone2
4
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Input selection keys
1
2
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
MAIN/ZONE2
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.
Press RECEIVER z.
For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.
Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.
• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.58)
When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front
display.
• Playing back iPod music (p.65)
• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.69)
Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.
• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.72)
• Listening to Internet radio (p.75)
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MEMORY
9
3
10
0
ENT
Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you
connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see
“Multi-zone output” (p.141).
• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.77)
• You cannot select USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For
example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the
main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”.
• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the web control
to control Zone2. For details on the web control function, refer to
“Supplement for Web Control” on the CD-ROM.
• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the
main zone.
Caution
• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
PLAYBACK ➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En
84
■ Other operations for Zone2
RECEIVER
SOURCE
The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
Press VOLUME or MUTE.
Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)
Press SCENE.
TUNER
MAIN
The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music
that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,
stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this
function when you want to use main zone music as background
music for a house party.
Adjusting the volume
AUDIO
ZONE 2
PARTY
1
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
SCENE
MUTE
Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or
off.
Setting the sleep timer
When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the
front display.
Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30
min, off).
Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds
ENTER
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
RETURN
DISPLAY
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
BAND
MODE
TUNING
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.113) in
the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).
• If “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, Zone2
output is available only when an HDMI input is selected in the main zone.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Press PARTY.
• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,
hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front
display.
VOLUME
OPTION
■ Enjoying the same source in multiple
rooms (party mode)
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (2.0 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
MEMORY
9
10
0
ENT
Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.
b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.
c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
• When “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”, the
following functions are not available.
– Adjusting the volume, high/low-frequency sound and front speaker balance
– Registering the volume and tone control settings to a scene
PLAYBACK ➤
Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)
En
85
Viewing the current status
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
Switching information on the front display
AUDIO
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
1
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
Input source group
USB
SERVER
AirPlay
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
DOCK
TAG
HD
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
NET RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
Info
AudioDecoder
Item
Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name*)
* During simple playback of iPod:
DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name*)
Item name
TOP MENU
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.
OPTION
Viewing the status information on the TV
ENTER
DOCK
TAG
HD
RETURN
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
HD 3
BAND
AV1
ProLogic
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio
decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.
Information
1
MOVIE
Press DISPLAY.
The following information is displayed on the TV.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
Compressed Music Enhancer status
INFO
3
7
4
8
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
Input source group
Item
AV 1–7
V-AUX
AUDIO 1–4
PHONO
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder
(decoder name*)
TUNER
* (U.S.A. model only)
HD Radio data is also available when the unit is tuned
into an HD Radio station (p.60).
* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.62).
Input source/
Party mode
status
Volume
Audio format/
Decoder
Sound
mode
CINEMA DSP status
2
To close the information display, press DISPLAY.
PLAYBACK ➤ Viewing the current status
En
86
Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.
1
Press OPTION.
Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.
DOCK
TAG
HD
IN OUT 1 OUT 2
PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
2
3
4
SLEEP
HD 3
Option
ToneControl
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Front display
Item
Function
Page
Tone Control
(Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.
88
Adaptive DRC
(Adaptive DRC)
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.
88
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
88
Dialogue Level
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds.
Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Lvl)
(Dialog Adjust) Dialogue Lift
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds.
(Dialog Lift)
TV screen
2
Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.
To exit from the menu, press OPTION.
Extended Surround
(EXTD Surround)
Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)
Input Trim
(In.Trim)
89
89
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources
when surround back speakers are used.
89
Corrects volume differences between input sources.
89
Subwoofer
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Trim (SW.Trim)
90
Enhancer
(Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
90
Video Mode
(Video Mode)
Enables/disables the video signal processing
settings configured in the “Setup” menu.
90
Audio Select
(Audio Select)
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than
one audio connection is made for one input source.
90
Audio Mode
(Audio Mode)
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM
radio reception.
90
FM Mode
(FM Mode)
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio
reception.
91
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En
87
Item
Function
Page
Hold/Unhold
(Hold/Unhold)
(U.S.A. model only)
Enables/disables the hold function when the unit is
tuned into an HD Radio station.
61
Traffic Program
(TrafficProgram)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.
63
Shuffle
(Shuffle)
Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.68),
USB storage device (p.71), or media server (p.74).
—
Repeat
(Repeat)
Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.68),
USB storage device (p.71), or media server (p.74).
—
Default
Bypass (Bypass)
• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.
Adjusting with the front panel controls
On (On)
Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.
Off (Off) (default)
The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.
If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
On
Off
Input level
Volume: high
Output level
Output level
Volume: low
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments
Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.
Settings
■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)
■ Adaptive DRC (Adaptive DRC)
On
Off
Input level
■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (CINEMA DSP 3D)
Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.53). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).
Settings
On (On) (default)
Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.
Off (Off)
Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.
a Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En
88
■ Dialogue Adjust (Dialog Adjust)
■ Extended Surround (EXTD Surround)
Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
❑ Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)
Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you
can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.
Setting range
0 to 3
Default
0
Settings
Auto (Auto)
(default)
Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.
bPLIIx Movie
(bPLIIxMo)
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.
bPLIIx Music
(bPLIIxMu)
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.
EX/ES (EX/ES)
Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
Off (Off)
Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital Surround EX signal is input, the unit
reproduces the signal in 5.1-channel.)
❑ Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)
Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is
coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this
setting.
• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.
– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence
speakers are used.
– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.53) is working.
(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)
• Some early Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround
back channel. We recommend you set “Extended Surround” to “bPLIIx Movie” or “EX/ES” when playing
back those sources.
Setting range
0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)
Default
0
■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.
❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)
Ideal position
Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En
89
❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
■ Audio Select (Audio Select)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for
one input source.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
Settings
■ Enhancer (Enhancer)
Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.57).
Auto (Auto) (default)
Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.
1. HDMI input
2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)
3. Analog input (AUDIO)
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
HDMI (HDMI)
Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals
are input through the HDMI jack.
Coax/Opt
(Coax/Opt)
Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are
produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or
OPTICAL jack.
Analog (Analog)
Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when
no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.57).
Settings
Off (Off)
Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.
On (On)
Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.
■ Audio Mode (Audio Mode)
Default
TUNER, USB, (network sources): On (On)
Others: Off (Off)
(U.S.A. model only)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM/AM radio reception.
• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.
• This setting is applied separately to each band (FM/AM).
■ Video Mode (Video Mode)
Settings
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings
configured in “Processing” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu.
Settings
Processing
(Processing)
Enables the video signal processing.
Direct (Direct)
(default)
Disables the video signal processing.
Auto (Auto) (default)
Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in stereo sounds when the
signal reception is good and in monaural sounds when it is not good.
Mono (Mono)
Receives the selected band (FM or AM) in monaural sounds.
• HD Radio programs are not available when the unit is in the monaural reception mode.
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En
90
■ FM Mode (FM Mode)
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.
Settings
Stereo (Stereo)
(default)
Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.
Mono (Mono)
Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.
PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
En
91
CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring input sources (Input menu)
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
3
5
6
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured
and press the cursor key (q).
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Input menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
Item
Function
Rename/Icon Select
Changes the input source name and icon.
93
Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS.
93
Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via
AirPlay.
93
Video Out
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
93
DMC Control
Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media
Controller (DMC) to control playback.
94
The input source of the unit also changes.
• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
CONFIGURATIONS
Page
➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu)
En
92
■ Rename/Icon Select
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, USB, MULTI CH
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).
■ Decoder Mode
Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.
For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder
Mode” to “DTS”.
Input sources
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)
Settings
Auto (default)
Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.
DTS
Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)
■ Volume Interlock
Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.
• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.
2
3
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
Input sources
AirPlay
Settings
Off
Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.
Limited (default)
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range
(-80 dB to 0 dB and mute).
Full
Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).
■ Video Out
Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.
Input sources
TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH
Settings
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
5
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
Off
Does not output video.
AV 1–7, V-AUX
Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.
Default
USB: V-AUX
Others: Off
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring input sources (Input menu)
En
93
■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Input source
SERVER
Settings
Disable
Does not allow DMCs to control playback.
Enable (default)
Allows DMCs to control playback.
Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.50) using the TV screen.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and
press the cursor key (q).
Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.
• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.
• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En
94
4
■ Load
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.
Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene
assignments.
❑ Device Control
Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to
the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)
Settings
5
6
Off
Disables the SCENE link playback function.
HDMI Control
Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this
if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is
connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports
HDMI Control.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Default
SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control
SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off
Scene menu items
Item
Function
Save
Registers the current settings in the selected scene.
Page
95
Load
Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can
also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items
to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
95
Rename/Icon Select
Changes the scene name and icon.
96
Reset
Restores the default settings for the selected scene.
96
• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI
Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141).
■ Save
Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the
selected scene.
• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device
assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.51).
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En
95
❑ Detail
■ Rename/Icon Select
Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings
currently assigned to the selected scene.
Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.
To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).
For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with
low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and
include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).
■ Setup procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).
2
3
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Check or uncheck
Choices
Input
Input (p.49), Audio Select (p.90)
HDMI Output
HDMI Output (p.49)
Mode
Sound Program (p.52), Pure Direct Mode (p.107), Enhancer (p.57)
Sound
Tone Control (p.88), Adaptive DRC (p.88)
Surround
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.88), Dialogue Lift (p.89), Dialogue Level
(p.89), Subwoofer Trim (p.90), Extended Surround (p.89)
Video
Video Mode (p.108)
Volume
Master Volume (p.49)
Lipsync
Lipsync (p.106), Delay (p.107)
Speaker Setup
Setting Pattern (p.103), PEQ Select (p.105)
Default
Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected
Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Reset
Restores the default settings (p.50) for the selected scene.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)
En
96
4
Configuring sound programs/surround
decoders (Sound Program menu)
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the
TV screen.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Sound Program” and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.
5
6
3
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be
configured and press the cursor key (q).
• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En
97
Sound Program menu items
Item
Function
Settings
Reverb Time
Adjust the decay time of the rear
reverberant sound.
1.0 s to 5.0 s
Higher to enrich the
reverberant sound and lower
to have clear sound.
Reverb Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and reverberant sound
generation.
0 ms to 250 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Reverb Level
Adjusts the volume of the reverberant
sound.
0% to 100%
Higher to strengthen the
reverberant sound, and lower
to weaken it.
• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.
■ Settings for sound programs
Item
Function
Settings
Decode Type
bPro Logic*, bPLIIx Movie
(bPLII Movie), bPLIIx
Music* (bPLII Music*),
Selects a surround decoder to be used bPLIIx Game* (bPLII
in combination with the selected sound Game*), Neo:6 Cinema,
Neo:6 Music*
program.
(* Available only when
“SURROUND DECODER” is
selected)
DSP Level
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
-6 dB to +3 dB (default: 0 dB)
Higher to enhance the sound
field effect, and lower to
reduce it.
Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and presence sound field
generation.
1 ms to 99 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Surround Initial Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround sound field
generation.
Surround Back Initial
Delay
Adjusts the delay between the direct
sound and surround back sound field
generation.
Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
presence sound field.
Surround Room Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround sound field.
Surround Back Room
Size
Adjusts the broadening effect of the
surround back sound field.
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the presence sound
field.
Surround Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround sound
field.
Surround Back
Liveness
Adjusts the loss of the surround back
sound field.
The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.
Sound program
2ch Stereo
1 ms to 49 ms
Higher to enhance the delay
effect, and lower to reduce it.
Item
Function
Settings
Direct
Selects whether to
automatically bypass the
DSP circuit when an
analog audio source is
played back.
Auto (default), Off
Level
Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to +5 (default: 0)
Front / Rear Balance
Adjusts the front and rear
volume balance.
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Higher to enhance the front
side, and lower to enhance
the rear side.
Left / Right Balance
Adjusts the right and left
volume balance.
-5 to +5 (default: 0)
Higher to enhance the right
side, and lower to enhance
the left side.
Height Balance
Adjust the height volume
balance using the front
presence speakers.
0 to 10 (default: 5)
Higher to enhance the
upside, and lower to
enhance the downside. (The
front presence speakers do
not produce sounds when
“Height Balance” is set to
“0”.)
Monaural Mix
Enables/disables
monaural sound output.
Off (default), On
7ch Stereo
0.1 to 2.0
Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower
to reduce it.
0 to 10
Higher to enhance the
reflectivity, and lower to
reduce it.
• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En
98
■ Settings for decoders
The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND
DECODER” to “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.
Decode Type
Item
Function
Settings
Panorama
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the front sound
field.
Off (default), On
Select “On” to wrap front right/left
channel sounds around the field
and generate a spacious sound
field in combination with the
surround sound field.
Center Width
Adjusts the broadening
effect of the center
sound field.
0 to 7 (default: 3)
Higher to enhance the broadening
effect, and lower to reduce it
(closer to center).
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in
level between the front
and surround sound
fields.
-3 to +3 (default: 0)
Higher to strengthen the front
sound field and lower to strengthen
the surround sound field.
Center Image
Adjusts the center
orientation level
(broadening effect) of
the front sound field.
0.0 to 1.0 (default: 0.3)
Higher to strengthen the center
orientation level (less broadening
effect) and lower to weaken (more
broadening effect).
bPLIIx Music
(bPLII Music)
Neo:6 Music
CONFIGURATIONS ➤
Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (Sound Program menu)
En
99
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.
4
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.
• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.
5
6
Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
100
Setup menu items
Menu
Item
Function
Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO).
41
Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
103
Setting Data Copy
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
103
Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
103
Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.
103
Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
104
Surround
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.
104
Surround Back
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.
104
Front Presence
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.
104
Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
104
Extra Bass
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
105
Bass Cross Over
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”.
105
Auto Setup
Speaker
Page
Configuration
Manual Setup
Lipsync
Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.
105
Level
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
105
Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
105
Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output.
106
Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
106
Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
106
Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.
107
Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.
107
Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
107
Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.
107
Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode.
107
Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
107
Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
108
HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input).
109
Audio Output
Selects a device to output audio.
109
Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.
110
Sound
Video
HDMI
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
101
Menu
Item
Function
Page
IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
110
Network Standby
Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.
111
MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
111
Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.
111
Network
Main Zone Set
Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
112
Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
112
Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone.
112
Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
112
Mono
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
113
Zone Scene Rename
Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display.
113
Zone Rename
Zone2 Set
Multi Zone
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
113
Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used.
113
HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
113
Party Mode Set
Enables/disables switching to the party mode.
113
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source.
114
Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
114
Short Message
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated.
114
Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
114
Input Assignment
Display Set
Function
Trigger Output1 Trigger Mode
Trigger Output2 Target Zone
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
115
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
115
DC OUT
Selects how to supply power through the DC OUT jack.
115
Memory Guard
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
116
Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.
116
ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).
117
Select an on-screen menu language.
117
Power Mode
ECO
Language
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
102
Speaker (Manual Setup)
Configures the speaker settings manually.
■ Power Amp Assign
Selects a speaker system.
The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2
subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.
You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power
amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.
Settings
■ Setting Pattern
Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.
Basic (default)
Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to
7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.16).
7ch +1ZONE
Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone
and Zone2 speakers (p.22).
5ch BI-AMP
Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including
bi-amp front speakers) (p.21).
5ch BI-AMP +SB
Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including
bi-amp front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using
an external amplifier (p.22).
When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in
the selected pattern.
• Measurement results (Auto Setup)
■ Configuration
• Power Amp Assign
Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.
• Configuration
• Distance
• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).
• Level
❑ Front
• Parametric EQ
Settings
Pattern1 (default), Pattern2
• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Auto Setup” and “Manual Setup” screens.
• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your
listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,
you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.
■ Setting Data Copy
Selects the size of the front speakers.
Settings
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.
• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.
Choices
Pattern1 > 2
Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.
Pattern2 > 1
Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
103
❑ Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.
Small x2 (default)
Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.
Settings
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”.
Small (default)
None
Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.
Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected.
❑ Front Presence
Settings
❑ Surround
Use (default)
Select this option when front presence speakers are connected.
Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.
None
Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.
Settings
Large
Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.
Small (default)
Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
None
Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.
❑ Surround Back
❑ Subwoofer
Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.
Settings
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not
reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.
Reverse
Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.
Use
None
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Normal
(default)
Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front
speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and
low-frequency components from other channels.
Settings
Large x1
Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Large x2
Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.
Small x1
Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Bass Cross Over”).
• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
104
❑ Extra Bass
■ Level
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Settings
Off (default)
Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.
On
Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel
low-frequency components.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB
• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”.
❑ Bass Cross Over
■ Parametric EQ
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker
whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be
produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.
Settings
Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz
• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.
YPAO:Flat
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.
YPAO:Front
Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as
the front speakers.
YPAO:Natural
Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.
Through
Does not use the equalizer.
■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,
Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer
Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments
• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto
Setup” have already been saved (p.41). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.
■ Manual equalizer adjustment
1
2
3
Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.
Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.
Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.
Default
3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.
• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.41) to the “Manual” fields for
fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
105
4
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands
and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Sound
Configures the audio output settings.
Setting range
Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB
5
To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER
repeatedly to select an item.
Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected
band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and
the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.
Setting range
Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz
Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080
6
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.
■ Lipsync
Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.
❑ Delay Enable
Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4
Settings
Disable
Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
Enable (default)
Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.
❑ Auto/Manual Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range
Settings
Off (default)
Does not output test tones.
On
Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.
Auto (default)
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.
Manual
Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.
• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV
connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
106
❑ Adjustment
■ Initial Volume
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual
Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when
“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
Off (default)
Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max
Volume”.)
■ Pure Direct Mode
Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.57).
Setting range
0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)
Default
0 ms
Settings
Auto (default)
Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from
the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with
the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input,
the wall paper is displayed.
Video Off
Does not output video signals including the wall paper.
• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.
■ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings
Maximum (default)
Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.
Standard
Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.
Minimum/Auto
Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.
■ Adaptive DSP Level
Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.
Settings
Off
Does not adjust the effect level automatically.
On (default)
Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO
measurement results and the volume level.
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
107
Video
❑ Aspect
Configures the video output settings.
Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
Through (default)
Does not convert the aspect ratio.
16:9 Normal
Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side
of the screen.
• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or
2160p (4K) signals.
■ Video Mode
Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).
Settings
Direct (default)
Disables the video signal processing.
Processing
Enables the video signal processing.
Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to
reduce video output delay.
• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not
displayed on the TV screen.
❑ Resolution
Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to
“Processing”.
Settings
Through
Does not convert the resolution.
Auto (default)
Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.
480p/576p, 720p,
1080i, 1080p, 4K
Output video signals with a selected resolution.
(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)
• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.121) in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on
your TV normally.)
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
108
❑ ARC
HDMI
Enables/disables ARC (p.26) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Configures the HDMI settings.
Settings
Off
Disables ARC.
On (default)
Enables ARC.
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.
❑ Standby Sync
■ HDMI Control
Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.141).
Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Settings
Off (default)
Disables HDMI Control.
On
Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby
Sync”.
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
On
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.
Auto (default)
Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.
■ Audio Output
• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.
❑ TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.
Settings
AUDIO 1–4
Default
AUDIO 1
Selects a device to output audio.
• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) is set to “Main”.
❑ Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to
the unit.
Settings
Off
Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
On (default)
Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.
• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting
an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
109
❑ HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2
Network
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or
HDMI OUT 2 jack.
Configures the network settings.
Settings
Off (default)
Disables the audio output from the TV.
On
Enables the audio output from the TV.
• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.
■ Standby Through
Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby
mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).
Settings
■ IP Address
Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).
❑ DHCP
Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Off (default)
Does not output videos/audio to the TV.
On
Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
Settings
Off
Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.
On (default)
Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).
• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.
■ Manual network settings
1
2
Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.
IP Address
Specifies an IP address.
Subnet Mask
Specifies a subnet mask.
Default Gateway
Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.
DNS Server (P)
Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.
DNS Server (S)
Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
4
5
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
110
6
7
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
■ Network Standby
Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).
Settings
Off (default)
Disables the network standby function.
On
Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)
■ Network Name
Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■ Procedure
1
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.
❑ Filter
Enables/disables the MAC address filter.
Settings
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
Off (default)
Disables the MAC address filter.
On
Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.
❑ MAC Address 1–10
3
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted
access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.
■ Procedure
1
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10”
and press ENTER.
2
3
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER.
4
5
6
To confirm the setting, press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.
To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
111
Multi Zone
Configures the multi zone settings.
■ Zone2 Set
Configures the Zone2 settings.
❑ Volume
Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable
volume adjustments for Zone2.
Settings
■ Main Zone Set
Fixed
Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
Variable (default)
Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.
• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.103) is set to “7ch +1ZONE.
Configures the main zone setting.
❑ Zone Rename
Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
■ Procedure
1
2
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.
❑ Max Volume
Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.
Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB
Default
+16.5 dB
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
❑ Initial Volume
Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.
Settings
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
3
Off (default)
Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby
mode.
On
Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB
increments).
(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
112
❑ Mono
❑ Zone Rename
Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.
Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.
You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone
Set” (p.112).
Settings
Off (default)
Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.
On
Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.
❑ Zone Scene Rename
Changes the scene names (for Zone2) displayed on the front display.
■ Procedure
1
2
3
■ Monitor Out Assign
Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO,
S VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used.
Settings
Main (default), Zone2
Use the cursor keys to select a scene to be renamed and press ENTER.
Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the
entry.
• To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video
monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from
the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
with a component video cable.
■ HDMI OUT2 Assign
Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.
Settings
Main (default), Zone2
• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.141).
■ Party Mode Set
• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.
4
Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.
Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.85).
Choice
Target: Zone2
Settings
• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.
5
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Disable
Disables switching to the party mode.
Enable (default)
Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party
mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
113
Function
3
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.
• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.
■ Display Set
Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.
❑ Dimmer (Front Display)
Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
■ Input Assignment
Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input
source.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Default
0
■ Procedure
• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.117) is set to “On”.
Example: assigning the OPTICAL (e) jack to the input source “AV 2”
❑ Short Message
1
Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,
and press ENTER.
Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment).
Settings
On (default)
Displays short messages on the TV screen.
Off
Does not display short messages on the TV screen.
❑ Wallpaper
Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.
Settings
2
Use the cursor keys to select “e” and press ENTER.
Picture 1 (default),
Picture 2, Picture 3
Displays the selected image on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
Gray
Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video
signal.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
114
■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2
❑ Target Zone
Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone
or input switching.
Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.
Settings
❑ Trigger Mode
Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.
Main
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.
Settings
Power (default)
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the
zone specified with “Target Zone”.
Zone2
Source
The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in
the zone specified with “Target Zone”.
An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in
“Source.”
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.
All (default)
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.
When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission
is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.
Manual
Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal
transmission with “Manual”.
■ DC OUT
Source
Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching
when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.
Choices
AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), USB, MULTI CH
Settings
Configures the DC OUT jack setting.
❑ Power Mode
Selects how to supply power to the Yamaha AV accessory connected to the DC OUT
jack.
Settings
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input
source specified in this option.
High (default)
Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source
specified in this option.
Manual
Continuous (default)
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack continuously regardless of
the power state (on/standby) of the unit.
Main Zone Power
Sync.
Supplies power through the DC OUT jack only when the main zone is
turned on.
(This setting may not work properly on some accessories.)
Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger
Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of
the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.
Choices
Low
Stops the electronic signal transmission.
High (default)
Transmits the electronic signal.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
115
■ Memory Guard
ECO
Prevents accidental changes to the settings.
Configures the power supply settings.
Settings
Off (default)
Does not protect the settings.
On
Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.
• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.
Icon
■ Auto Power Standby
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for
the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.
Settings
Off
Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.
2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours
Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.
Default
U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours
Other models: Off
• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
En
116
■ ECO Mode
Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.
Settings
Viewing information about the unit
(Information menu)
You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.
Off (default)
Disables the eco mode.
On
Enables the eco mode.
1
2
Press ON SCREEN.
3
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.
4
To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.
Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.
• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.
Language
Select an on-screen menu language.
Settings
English (default)
English
日本語
Japanese
Français
French
Deutsch
German
Español
Spanish
Russian
Italiano
Italian
Chinese
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu)
En
117
■ Network
Types of information
Displays the network information on the unit.
■ Audio Signal
IP Address
IP address
Displays information about the current audio signal.
Subnet Mask
Subnet mask
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway
DNS Server (P)
The IP address of the primary DNS server
Format
Audio format of the input signal
Channel
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total
(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).
Input
Sampling
The number of samples per second of the input digital signal
Bitrate
The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal
Dialogue
Output
The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal
The speaker terminals from which signals are output
DNS Server (S)
The IP address of the secondary DNS server
MAC Address
MAC address
Network Name
Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.111)
Status
The connection status of the NETWORK jack
■ System
Displays the system information on the unit.
• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the
specifications and settings of the playback device.
■ Video Signal
Displays information about the current video signal.
HDMI Signal
Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output
HDMI Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)
Analog Resolution
Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks (analog)
■ HDMI Monitor
Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.
Interface
TV interface
Video Resolution
Resolutions supported by the TV
Remote ID
The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.120)
TV Format
The unit’s video signal type (p.120)
Speaker Impedance
The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.119)
Tuner Freq. Step
(Asia and General models only)
The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.120)
System ID
System ID number
Firmware Version
The version of firmware installed on the unit
• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of
the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You
can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating
the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.128).
■ Multi Zone
Displays information about Zone2.
Input
The input source selected for Zone2
Volume
The volume for Zone2
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Viewing information about the unit (Information menu)
En
118
ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)
Item
Function
SPEAKER IMP.
Changes the speaker impedance setting.
119
REMOTE SENSOR
Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit.
120
REMOTE CON AMP
Selects the unit’s remote control ID.
120
While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z.
TUNER FRQ STEP
(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.
120
MAIN ZONE z
TV FORMAT
Switches the video signal type.
120
MONITOR CHECK
Removes the limitation on HDMI video output.
121
RECOV./BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings
from the backup.
121
INITIALIZE
Restores the default settings.
121
FIRM UPDATE
Updates the firmware.
122
VERSION
Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
122
Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.
1
2
Set the unit to standby mode.
STRAIGHT
PROGRAM
3
4
5
Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Page
Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.
Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on
again.
The new settings take effect.
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
SPEAKERIMP.
8MIN
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.
Settings
6  MIN
Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
8  MIN (default)
Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En
119
Turning on/off the remote control sensor
(REMOTE SENSOR)
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
REMOTESENSOR
ON
(Asia and General models only)
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor
is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.
Settings
ON (default)
Turns on the remote control sensor.
OFF
Turns off the remote control sensor.
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
REMOTECONAMP
ID1
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
SLEEP
HD 3
TUNERFRQSTEP
FM50/AM9
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
FM100/AM10
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.
FM50/AM9 (default)
Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.
Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2
■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.
1
2
3
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting
(TUNER FRQ STEP)
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
TVFORMAT
NTSC
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Settings
NTSC, PAL
Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL
Press CODE SET on the remote control.
Press RECEIVER.
Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).
Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1.
• The registered remote control codes (p.123) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En
120
Removing the limitation on HDMI video output
(MONITOR CHECK)
Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)
SPIMP.-
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
MONITORCHECK
YES
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
RECOV./BACKUP
BACKUP
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”
(p.108) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a
different resolution than the detected resolution.
Settings
YES (default)
Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
resolution supported by the TV only.)
SKIP
Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a
specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)
Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.
■ Backup/recovery procedure
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO
to start the process.
Choices
BACKUP
Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.
RECOVERY
Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when
backup has been created).
Note
• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored
correctly.
• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV
after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.
• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).
Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
INITIALIZE
CANCEL
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
VIDEO
Restores the default settings for video configurations.
ALL
Restores the default settings for the unit.
CANCEL
Does not perform an initialization.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En
121
Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)
SPIMP.-
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
FIRMUPDATE
USB
Checking the firmware version (VERSION)
SPIMP.-
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit
is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For
details, refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
DOCK
TAG
HD
STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY
ZONE ZONE ZONE
3
4
IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2
ENHANCER SLEEP
HD 3
VERSION
x.xx
MUTE VOLUME
ADAPTIVE DRC
PL L C R PR
SL SW1 SW SW2 SR
PL SBL SB SBR PR
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.
• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.118) in the “Information” menu.
• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.
1
Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
USB
Update the firmware using a USB memory device.
NETWORK
Update the firmware via the network.
• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after
ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.128).
CONFIGURATIONS ➤
Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)
En
122
SOURCE
RECEIVER
SOURCE
Controlling external devices with the remote control
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.
• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other
ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the
registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register
the codes again.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
OPTION
ENTER
RETURN
BAND
MODE
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
3
4
■ TV operations
Registering the remote control code for a TV
Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.
7
8
TV operation keys
Numeric keys
MEMORY
10
0
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
Once the remote control code is successfully registered, SOURCE
blinks twice.
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.
MUSIC
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
9
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
Press TV z.
• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)
DISPLAY
TUNING
3
4
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device.
AUDIO
TV CH
CODE SET
TV operation keys
TV z
CODE SET
• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.124). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).
INPUT
Switches the video inputs of the TV.
MUTE
Mutes the audio output of the TV.
TV VOL
Adjust the volume of the TV.
TV CH
Switch the channels of the TV.
TV z
Turns on/off the TV.
• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.125).
1
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find your TV’s remote control code.
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list.
If that does not work, try the other codes.
2
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control
En
123
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
SOURCE z
SOURCE
RECEIVER
AUDIO
Input selection keys
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices
You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
TOP MENU
• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
You can also assign a function to each key using the learning function (p.125).
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
External device
operation keys
1
■ Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.
• By pressing SOURCE or RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit after pressing RECEIVER (lights up in
orange), and an external device after pressing SOURCE (lights up in green). For
example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio after pressing RECEIVER
and the external device after pressing SOURCE.
SOURCE z
Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find the remote control code for your playback
device.
Turns on/off the playback device.
Cursor keys
Menu operation
keys
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.
TOP MENU
Displays the top menu.
Menu operation keys
ENTER
DISPLAY
RETURN
DISPLAY
• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
2
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.
Numeric keys
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
TV operation keys
INPUT
MUTE
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
TV VOL
Select an item.
TV CH
CODE SET
3
CODE SET
External device
operation keys
POP-UP/MENU
Displays the pop-up menu.
s
Stops playback.
d
Stops playback temporarily.
a
Starts playback of the selected
song/video.
h
j
Press the input selection key.
Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
f
For example, press AV 1 to set the remote control code for
the playback device connected to the AV 1 jack.
4
Switches information on the display.
Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is registered successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.
g
Skips forward/backward.
Numeric keys
Enter numerical values.
TV operation keys
Control the TV (p.123).
• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.
• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.51).
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control
En
124
RECEIVER
SOURCE
SOURCE z
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
1
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
External device
operation keys
RETURN
2
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
External device
operation keys
PRESET
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
7
8
9
10
0
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
TV operation keys
TV z
CODE SET
3
4
b On the external device, press the key from which the operation is
learned.
SOURCE blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, learning has failed. Repeat Step 5.
Press one of the following keys depending on the
type of your device.
For TV: press TV z.
Numeric keys
MEMORY
For TV: TV operation keys
Once the operation is learned successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
For playback device: press the input selection key
(corresponding to the input jacks where the device is
connected).
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
For playback device: SOURCE z, menu operations keys,
external device operation keys
Press CODE SET.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
Menu operation keys
ENTER
Perform the following steps within 10 seconds.
a On the unit, press one of the following keys to which you want to
assign a function.
The remote control of the unit can receive remote control signals
from other infrared remote controls and learn the remote control
operation. If you cannot find a remote control code for your
playback device or if any key on the remote control does not work
after you register the remote control code, use the learning function
to assign a function to each key.
TUNER
ZONE 2
5
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
AUDIO
MAIN
Programming from other remote controls
(learning)
Use the numeric keys to enter “9990”.
6
Repeat step 5 until all desired operations are
learned.
7
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks once.
Note
• If you press RECEIVER in step 2, you can assign functions of an external
receiver to the menu operation keys, external device operation keys or
numeric keys. However, it makes these keys to control the unit impossible. If
you need to restore the remote control code for the unit, perform the following
steps.
a Press CODE SET.
Aim the infrared transmitters of the remote controls
at each other.
b Press RECEIVER.
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.
Remote control of external device
4
RECEIVER
3
V-AUX
SOURCE
2
7
AV
1
6
4
5
3
NET
USB
AUDIO
2
HDMI OUT
MULTI
PARTY
VOLUME
1
4
SCENE
MUTE
POP-UP/MENU
PHONO
RADIO
ZONE 2
3
TUNER
2
NET
MAIN
1
TV
PROGRAM
BD/DVD
TOP MENU
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4”) apart
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control
En
125
SOURCE
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
AUDIO
ZONE 2
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
1
1
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
2
OPTION
Press one of the following keys to select the device
for which key assignments will be cleared.
ENTER
For playback device: press the input selection key.
RETURN
For TV: press TV z.
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
3
4
PRESET
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
3
4
7
8
10
0
MUTE
2
Press one of the following keys to select the device
for which key assignments will be cleared.
For playback device: press the input selection key.
For TV: press TV z.
3
Use the numeric keys to enter “9992”.
Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 1.
Use the numeric keys to enter “9991”.
Press the key that you want to reset.
ENT
If it blinks six times, clearing failed. Repeat from Step 2.
TV
TV z
INPUT
TV VOL
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
Once the key assignment is cleared successfully, SOURCE
blinks twice.
Numeric keys
MEMORY
9
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks twice.
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
■ Clearing the assignment for each key
SCENE
1
■ Clearing the assignments for each input
source
Input selection keys
TUNER
MAIN
Clearing functions learned from other
remote controls
TV CH
CODE SET
CODE SET
5
Repeat step 4 until all desired key assignments are
cleared.
6
Press CODE SET.
SOURCE blinks once.
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control
En
126
SOURCE
RECEIVER
SOURCE
Resetting remote control codes
RECEIVER
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
You can reset a remote control code registered to each input
selection key.
AUDIO
Input selection keys
1
SOURCE blinks twice.
TUNER
MAIN
Press CODE SET.
ZONE 2
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.
SCENE
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
TOP MENU
2
3
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
Press the input selection key.
Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.
OPTION
Once the remote control code is reset successfully, SOURCE blinks
twice.
ENTER
RETURN
If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.
DISPLAY
BAND
To reset the remote control to factory default settings
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
a Press CODE SET.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
b Press RECEIVER.
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
5
6
9
0
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.
3
7
4
8
Numeric keys
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
CODE SET
CONFIGURATIONS
➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control
En
127
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
RECEIVER
SOURCE
AV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
V-AUX
New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
PHONO
MULTI
USB
NET
PARTY
HDMI OUT
3
If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z
on the front panel.
TUNER
MAIN
ZONE 2
1
2
3
4
BD/DVD
TV
NET
RADIO
• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).
TOP MENU
• If the Internet connection speed is slow or if the unit is connected to the
wireless network via a wireless network adapter, network update may not be
possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,
try the firmware update later or use the USB memory device (p.122).
VOLUME
MUTE
PROGRAM
The firmware update is complete.
Note
SCENE
• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation
mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a
message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.118). You can update the
unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.
POP-UP/MENU
ON
SCREEN
OPTION
Cursor keys
ENTER
ENTER
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
MODE
TUNING
PRESET
• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.122).
Information
icon
A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed
after ON SCREEN is pressed.
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE
MUSIC
INFO
SLEEP
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
ENHANCER PURE DIRECT
4
8
MEMORY
10
ENT
TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE
TV CH
CODE SET
Message
System Icon
1
2
Read the on-screen description.
To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to
select “START” and press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off.
CONFIGURATIONS ➤
Updating the unit’s firmware via the network
En
128
APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...
If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to
optimize the speaker settings again (p.41). If you want to adjust the speaker settings
manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.103).
Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.107). You can also set the maximum volume for
Zone2 (p.112).
I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.107). You can also set the initial
volume for Zone2 (p.112).
We are bothered by volume differences when switching
between input sources…
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.
I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during
operations...
By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated
(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you
when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.114) in the
“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.
I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.116).
The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.120).
You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in
the “Option” menu (p.89).
I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device
even when the unit is in standby mode...
I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output
videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in
standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu
to “On”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when
this function is enabled.
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.141). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
APPENDIX
➤ Frequently asked questions
En
129
Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.
Power, system and remote control
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The power does not turn on.
The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby
indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.
As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.
The power does not turn off.
The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.
The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.19).
The unit enters standby mode automatically.
The unit is not reacting.
The sleep timer worked.
Turn on the unit and start playback again.
The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.
To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”
menu to “Off” (p.116).
The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.119).
The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.
Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.19).
The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of
the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.117).
The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.
Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to
initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable
from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting
En
130
Problem
The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.
Cause
The unit is out of the operating range.
Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).
The batteries are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.
Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.
The remote control is set to control external devices.
Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in
orange).
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.120).
The remote control is set to control the unit.
Press SOURCE to set the remote control to control external devices (the key lights
up in green).
The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.
Set the remote control code again (p.123). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.
A remote control code for another playback device is assigned to
V-AUX.
Reset the remote control code registered to V-AUX (p.127).
The mobile device or its application is not externally controllable.
Directly operate the mobile device itself.
The batteries of the remote control of the unit and/or the external
device are weak.
Replace with new batteries.
External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.
The MHL-compatible mobile device cannot be
controlled using the remote control.
Remedy
The distance between the two remote controls is not appropriate.
The remote control does not learn new functions.
The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not
(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)
compatible with the remote control.
Memory capacity is full.
Place the remote controls at a proper distance (p.125).
Learning is impossible in this case.
Clear unnecessary assignments to free some memory space for new functions
(p.126).
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting
En
131
Audio
Problem
No sound.
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.
Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118).
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The maximum volume is set.
Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.107).
The volume cannot be increased.
A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.
The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118).
The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.
To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.106).
Audio output of the speaker is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change
the speaker settings (p.103).
The volume of the speaker is set too low.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the
speaker volume (p.105).
The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.
The speaker is malfunctioning.
To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.
The extended surround is disabled.
Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.89).
The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.
To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.105).
Subwoofer output is disabled.
Perform “Auto Setup” (p.41) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”
(p.104).
The volume of the subwoofer is too low.
Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.
The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.
Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.
In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.109).
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
No sound is coming from a specific speaker.
No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker.
No sound is coming from the subwoofer.
No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting
En
132
Problem
No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).
Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.
Cause
Remedy
The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.
Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.
A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with
an HDMI cable.
Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.26).
(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.
Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.109).
(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.
Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.109). Also, enable ARC on the TV.
The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.
To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). If necessary,
change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.
The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.
Move the unit further away from the device.
Noise/hum is heard.
The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The volume of the unit is too high.
Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to
“Off” (p.117).
A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on.
Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.
If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI
audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due
to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.82).
Cause
Remedy
Another input source is selected on the unit.
Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.
Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.121).
The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.
If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.
The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.
To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video
Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.118). For information about video signals
supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.143).
The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).
Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.
The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.
The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.
You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.26 to 29).
Another input source is selected on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).
The sound is distorted.
The sound is interrupted.
Video
Problem
No video.
No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).
The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting
En
133
Problem
The video is interrupted.
Cause
Remedy
(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)
Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.
Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you
are using (p.49).
(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2)
HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone
operations due to internal circuitry switching.
For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back
videos/audio” (p.82).
Cause
Remedy
There is multi-path interference.
Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
FM/AM radio
Problem
(U.S.A. model only)
Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.90).
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
(Except for U.S.A. model)
Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio
reception (p.91).
Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
AM radio reception is weak or noisy.
The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Select the station manually (p.58).
Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.
Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.
Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
The AM radio signal is weak.
Select the station manually (p.58).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.
AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.
Auto Preset has been used.
Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations and HD Radio station (U.S.A.
model only) only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.59).
The unit does not receive HD Radio signals.
(U.S.A. model only)
The unit is in the monaural reception mode.
Set “Audio Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Auto” (p.90).
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting
En
134
USB and network
Problem
Cause
Remedy
The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.
Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.
Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.
Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.
The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.
Use a USB device without an encryption function.
The files in the USB device cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The network feature does not function.
The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.
Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.110). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.110).
The media sharing setting is not correct.
Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.72).
Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.
Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.
The unit and PC are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.111).
The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.
The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.
Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.72).
The files in the PC cannot be played back
continuously.
Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.
If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)
during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files
in the playback folder.
The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.
There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.
The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.
Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.
Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).
Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.
The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.
Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.
The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.
In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or
specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the
unit (p.111).
It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network.
Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.122).
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The unit does not detect the PC.
The Internet radio cannot be played.
The application for smartphone/tablet “AV
CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.
Firmware update via the network is failed.
APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting
En
135
Error indications on the front display
Message
Cause
Remedy
Access denied
Access to the PC is denied.
Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.72).
Access error
The unit cannot access the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot access the iPod.
Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.
The connected iPod is not supported by the unit.
Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.65).
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.37).
Check SP Wires
The speaker cables short circuit.
Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.
Internal Error
An internal error has occurred.
Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.
MHL Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the MHL-compatible mobile
device.
Turn off the unit and check the connection between the unit and mobile device.
No content
There are no playable files in the selected folder.
Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.
The unit cannot detect the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
The unit cannot detect the iPod.
Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.
Please wait
The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.
Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.
RemID Mismatch
The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.
Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.120).
Remote Off
The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the
remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.
Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.120).
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for
some reasons.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.
Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.
The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.
Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.72). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.
No device
Unable to play
USB Overloaded
An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.
Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.
Version error
Firmware update is failed.
Update the firmware again.
APPENDIX ➤
Error indications on the front display
En
136
Glossary
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.
DSD (Direct Stream Digital)
Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.
Dolby TrueHD
FLAC
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).
FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.
DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.
MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.
PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary
En
137
Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.
WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.
■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.
Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.
HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.
Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
MHL
MHL (Mobile High-definition Link) is the interface standard for high-speed digital video signal transmission
that is developed for mobile devices. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals
from mobile devices (such as smartphones) using a single cable with any loss. As with HDMI, MHL
complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the C
signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. This technology achieves more accurate color
reproduction than the composite video signal system.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary
En
138
Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.
CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)
Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without
front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D
sound field in your room.
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary
En
139
Video signal flow
Video signals input from a video device to the unit are
output to a TV as shown below.
■ Video conversion table
• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.108) in the “Setup” menu.
• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.
Video device
The unit
HDMI out
TV
Resolution
480i/
576i
480p/
576p
720p
1080i
1080p
4K
480i/576i
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
720p
m
m
m
m
1080i
m
m
m
m
1080p/
50, 60 Hz
m
m
m
m
m
m
480p/576p
HDMI in
HDMI out
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI in
1080p/24 Hz
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
COMPONENT
720p
VIDEO in
m
m
m
m
1080i
m
m
m
m
480i/576i
COMPONENT
VIDEO out
COMPONENT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PR
PR
PR
PB
PB
PB
PB
Y
Y
Y
Y
m
480p/576p
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO in
VIDEO
VIDEO
480p/
576p
720p
1080i
1080p
480i/
576i
480i/
576i
m
m
m
m
m
1080p
S VIDEO in
480i/
576i
m
4K
COMPONENT
VIDEO in
S VIDEO VIDEO
out
out
COMPONENT VIDEO out
S VIDEO out
S VIDEO
S VIDEO
S VIDEO in 480i/576i
m
m
m
m
m
m
VIDEO in
m
m
m
m
m
m
m
VIDEO out
VIDEO
VIDEO
480i/576i
m
m: Available
APPENDIX ➤ Glossary
En
140
Multi-zone output
Information on HDMI
■ Audio output
Using the unit’s
internal amplifier (p.23)
HDMI Control
Using an external amplifier (p.81)
Zone2 Out
EXTRA SP jacks
ZONE OUT jacks
In
HDMI OUT 2
(ZONE OUT) jack (*1)
m (*2)
Digital audio (HDMI)
Analog audio
(AUDIO)
m
m
USB (including iPod)
m
m
Network sources
m
m
TUNER
m
m
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.26) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.31).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control
• Standby synchronization
m: Available
*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*2 Stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected
• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
■ Video output
Zone2 Out
In
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*3)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
m
HDMI video
Component video
S-video
Composite video
m
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)
jack (*4)
Playback device
also turns off
The unit turns off
(standby)
Turn off the TV
m
m
Operations available from the unit’s remote control
m: Available
*3 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
*4 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.113) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.50)
• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)
• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.124)
APPENDIX
➤ Information on HDMI
En
141
(Example)
7
HDMI Control
HDMI Control
Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device
Playback starts
Press SCENE (BD/DVD)
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.
Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.
• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.
• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.
1
2
Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.109) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “ARC”, and
“Standby Sync”).
3
Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.
4
5
6
Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
APPENDIX
➤ Information on HDMI
En
142
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Audio signal type
Audio signal format
Compatible media (example)
2ch Linear PCM
2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio
Multichannel Linear PCM
8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD
DSD
2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
SACD
Bitstream
Dolby Digital, DTS
DVD-Video
Bitstream
(High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express
Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• VGA
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 480i/60 Hz
• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz
• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz
• 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.
APPENDIX
➤ Information on HDMI
En
143
Reference diagram (rear panel)
DC OUT
5V 0.5A
NETWORK
1
2
ARC
PHONO
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
AV 4
(1 BD/DVD)
HDMI
HDMI OUT
( 3 NET )
(ZONE OUT)
MONITOR OUT/
ZONE OUT
AV OUT
Y
AV 1
AV 2
AV 3
RS-232C
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV 7
(1 BD/DVD)
PB
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
Y AV 3
PB
C
TRIGGER
OUT
PR
AV 1
A
Y
GND
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
PB
PR
1
REMOTE
IN
OUT
AV 2
2
B
D
AV 4
AUDIO 1
(2 TV)
L
AUDIO 2
AUDIO 3
AUDIO 4
MULTI CH INPUT
12V
ZONE OUT
CENTER
PRE OUT
(SINGLE)
0.1A
1
R
2
1 COAXIAL
2 COAXIAL
3 OPTICAL
4 OPTICAL
5 OPTICAL
6 COAXIAL
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE 2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
CENTER
SPEAKERS
R
ANTENNA
75Ω
FM
HD Radio
SURROUND
L
R
SURROUND BACK
L
CENTER
R
FRONT
L
R
ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/
BI–AMP EXTRA SP
AC IN
L
(4 RADIO)
AM
SINGLE
(U.S.A. model)
• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.
APPENDIX
➤ Reference diagram (rear panel)
En
144
Trademarks
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a
trademark of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign
Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.
MHL and the MHL logo are a trademark, registered trademark or service mark of MHL, LLC in the United
States and/or other countries.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
AirPlay, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network
Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
Windows™
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
This receiver supports network connections.
Android™
Android is a trademark of Google Inc.
APPENDIX
➤ Trademarks
En
145
Specifications
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 10 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–4, PHONO, V-AUX)
MULTI CH INPUT x 1 (8 ch)
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R, SUBWOOFER)
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
• Video
- Dolby TrueHD
- Composite x 1
- Dolby Digital Plus
- S-video x 1
- Dolby Digital
- Component x 1
- DTS-HD Master Audio
AV OUT
- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
- Composite x 1
- DTS Express
- S-video x 1
- DTS
Optical x 4 (AV 3–4, AUDIO 1, V-AUX)
Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 2)
• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*)
• Video
Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)
S-video x 4 (AV 1–4)
Component x 4 (AV 1–4)
• HDMI Input
• Audio Format
MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT
* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2)
Other jacks
• YPAO MIC x 1
• REMOTE IN x 1
- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
• Content Protection: HDCP compatible
• Link Function: CEC supported
MHL
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX*)
• REMOTE OUT x 1
- VGA
* V-AUX: MHL input compatible
• TRIGGER OUT x 2
- 480i/60 Hz
• Others
• RS-232C x 1
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)
Output jacks
• Analog Audio
- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER,
SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R*1)
*1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE,
BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]
- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,
SURROUND BACK L/R)
• DC OUT x 1
HDMI
• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC
(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- 1080p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Audio Format
- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)
- 480i/60 Hz
- 576i/50 Hz
TUNER
- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz
- Audio x 1 (AV OUT)
- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
- ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)
- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
Optical x 1 (AV OUT)
- 576p/50 Hz
• Current Supply Capacity: 1.0 A
- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)
• Digital Audio
- 576i/50 Hz
- 480p/60 Hz
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
- 4K/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz
• Analog Tuner
[U.K. and Europe models]
FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)
[Other models]
FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)
• HD Radio tuner [U.S.A. model] x 1 (TUNER)
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications
En
146
USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory
• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A
Network
• PC Client Function
• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5
• AirPlay supported
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
PHONO to AV OUT ............................................. 0.02% or less
Front L/R .....................................................................135 W/ch
MULTI CH INPUT to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, 70 W, 8 )
Center ........................................................................135 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................135 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .....................................................135 W/ch
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )
Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] ..........................170 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)
• Internet Radio
(JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 )
Compatible Decoding Formats
[China, Korea, Asia and General models]
• Decoding Format
- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
Front L/R .....................................................................165 W/ch
Center.........................................................................165 W/ch
Surround L/R ..............................................................165 W/ch
Surround Back L/R .....................................................165 W/ch
- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround
• Post Decoding Format
- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
Audio Section
• Total Harmonic Distortion
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................ 3.5 mV/47 k
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k
• Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more
• Output Level / Output Impedance
............................................................................ 0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO to AV OUT (Input Shorted 5 mV)
[U.S.A., Canada, China and General models]... 86 dB or more
[Other models] ................................................... 81 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (Pure Direct, Input Shorted 250 mV)
......................................................................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation
PHONO (Input Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) ...60 dB/55 dB or more
AUDIO 2 etc. (Input 5.1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)
.................................................................60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control
Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)
• Tone Control Characteristics
Main Zone
Bass Boost/Cut ........................ ±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)
Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut......................±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
Zone2
AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 k
Bass Boost/Cut ............................ ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )
HEADPHONE OUT............................................. 150 mV/100 
Bass Turnover .............................................................350 Hz
Front L/R .............................................................110 W+110 W
PRE OUT
Treble Boost/Cut........................... ±10 dB/50 Hz (2 dB Step)
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
Center ............................................................................. 110 W
SUBWOOFER (50 Hz) ........................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k
Surround L/R.......................................................110 W+110 W
Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz) ............................ 1.0 V/1.2 k
Surround Back L/R .............................................110 W+110 W
ZONE OUT ............................................................ 1.0 V/1.2 k
(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )
Front L/R .............................................................120 W+120 W
Center ............................................................................. 120 W
Surround L/R.......................................................120 W+120 W
• Frequency Response
AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ................................+0/-3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics
(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)
..................................................................................12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .....................................................24 dB/oct.
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB
Surround Back L/R .............................................120 W+120 W
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications
En
147
Video Section
AM section
• Video Signal Type
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................ NTSC
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz
[Other models].................................................................... PAL
[Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) .....................NTSC/PAL
[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz
• Video Signal Level
Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 
S-video
General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 
[General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
C (NTSC) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models]
[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
..................................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 
[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
C (PAL) [Other models] ................................... 0.3 Vp-p/75 
[Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
Component
Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 
Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 
• Video Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. model].................................................... 490 W/620 VA
....................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
[Canada model] ................................................. 400 W/510 VA
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off) .....60 dB or more
[Korea model] .................................................................390 W
• Monitor Out Frequency Response (Video Conversion Off)
Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)
............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz
[Other models] ................................................................490 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off
[General model] .............................................. 0.35 W (Typical)
[Other models] .................................................. 0.3 W (Typical)
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On ........... 4.5 W (Typical)
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through On (AV 1, No Signals)
[Asia and General models]
.......................................................................... 4.5 W (Typical)
.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
Network Standby On ......................................... 2.2 W (Typical)
[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model]..................... 72 dB/70 dB
HD [U.S.A. model] ........................................................... 80 dB
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models] ...........................................1190 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
............................435 x 182 x 432 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17”)
* Including legs and protrusions
• Weight ...........................................................15.1 kg (33.3 lbs)
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo [except U.S.A. model]........................ 0.3%/0.5%
HD [U.S.A. model] .......................................................... 0.03%
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
• Antenna Input ................................................75  unbalanced
APPENDIX ➤ Specifications
En
148
Index
Symbols
Exclamation mark (!)
Lock icon (o) 116
128
Numerics
16:9 Normal (Aspect, Setup menu) 108
2.1-channel system 17
2ch Stereo (sound program) 55
3.1-channel system 17
4K signal (video signal resolution) 143
5.1-channel system 17
5ch BI-AMP (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 103
5ch BI-AMP (speaker configuration) 21
5ch BI-AMP +SB
(Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 103
5ch BI-AMP +SB (speaker configuration) 22
7.1+2-channel system 16
7.1-channel system 16
7ch +1ZONE (Power Amp Assign, Setup menu) 103
7ch +1ZONE (speaker configuration) 22
7ch Stereo (sound program) 55
A
Access denied (error indication) 136
Access error (error indication) 136
Action Game (sound program) 54
Adaptive DRC (Option menu) 88
Adaptive DSP Level (Sound, Setup menu)
Adjustment (Lipsync, Setup menu) 107
ADVANCED SETUP menu 119
Advanced speaker configuration 20
Adventure (sound program) 54
AirPlay 77
Album (HD Radio™) 60
AM antenna connection 36
AM radio listening 58
Amp (Audio Output, Setup menu) 109
ARC (Audio Return Channel) 26
ARC (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 109
Artist/Song (HD Radio™) 60
Aspect (Video Mode, Setup menu) 108
Audio Decoder (front display information) 86
Audio device connection 33
Audio file format (PC/NAS) 72
Audio file format (USB storage device) 69
AUDIO jack 25
Audio Mode (Option menu) 90
Audio Output (HDMI, Setup menu) 109
Audio program selection (HD Radio™) 60
Audio Return Channel (ARC) 26
Audio Select (Option menu) 90
Audio Signal (Information menu) 118
Auto Power Standby (ECO, Setup menu) 116
Auto Preset (FM radio) 64
Auto Preset (HD Radio™) 62
Auto Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 41
Auto/Manual Select (Lipsync, Setup menu) 106
Automatic speaker setting optimization 41
Automatic station preset (FM radio) 64
Automatic station preset (HD Radio™) 62
AutoPowerStdby (ECO, Setup menu) 116
AV OUT jack 11
B
107
Backup/recovery of the settings 121
Banana plug 19
Basic playback operation 49
Basic speaker configuration 16
Bass (Tone Control, Option menu) 88
Bass Cross Over (Speaker, Setup menu) 105
Bi-amp speaker connection 23
Bitrate (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118
Bitstream 143
C
CAT-5 cable
37
Category (HD Radio™) 60
Cellar Club (sound program) 55
Center (Speaker, Setup menu) 104
Center Image (Sound Program menu) 99
Center Width (Sound Program menu) 99
Chamber (sound program) 55
Channel (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118
Check SP Wires (error indication) 136
Check Sur. (YPAO error message) 47
CINEMA DSP 3D 53
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (Option menu) 88
CLASSICAL (sound program subcategory) 55
Clear Preset (FM/AM radio) 64
Clear Preset (HD Radio™) 62
Clearing (remote control) 126
Clock Time (Radio Data System) 62
COAXIAL jack 25
Component video cable 25
Component video connection (video device) 32
COMPONENT VIDEO jack 25
Composite video connection (video device) 33
Compressed Music Enhancer 57
Configuration (Speaker, Setup menu) 103
Crossover frequency setting 105
Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 41
D
DC OUT (Function, Setup menu) 115
DC OUT jack 11
Decode Type (Sound Program menu) 98
Decoder Mode (Input menu) 93
Decoder Off (front display information) 86
Default Gateway (IP Address, Setup menu) 110
Default Gateway (Network, Information menu) 118
Default setting restoration 121
Delay Enable (Lipsync, Setup menu) 106
Detail (Load, Scene menu) 96
Device Control (Load, Scene menu) 95
APPENDIX
➤ Index
En
149
DHCP (IP Address, Setup menu) 110
Dialog Adjust (Option menu) 89
Dialog Lift (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 89
Dialog Lvl (Dialog Adjust, Option menu) 89
Dialogue (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118
Dialogue Adjust (Option menu) 89
Dialogue Level (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 89
Dialogue Lift (Dialogue Adjust, Option menu) 89
Dialogue normalization level 118
Digital coaxial cable 25
Digital Media Controller (DMC) 94
Digital optical cable 25
Dimension (Sound Program menu) 99
Dimmer (Front Display) (Display Set, Setup menu) 114
Direct (Sound Program menu) 98
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) 137
DISPLAY key 13
Display Set (Function, Setup menu) 114
Distance (Speaker, Setup menu) 105
Distance (YPAO measurement result) 45
DLNA 72
DMC (Digital Media Controller) 94
DMC Control (Input menu) 94
DNS Server (IP Address, Setup menu) 110
DNS Server (Network, Information menu) 118
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) 89
Dolby Pro Logic (surround decoder) 56
Dolby Pro Logic II Game (surround decoder) 56
Dolby Pro Logic II Movie (surround decoder) 56
Dolby Pro Logic II Music (surround decoder) 56
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game (surround decoder) 56
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (Extended Surround) 89
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie (surround decoder) 56
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (Extended Surround) 89
Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music (surround decoder) 56
Drama (sound program) 54
DSD (Direct Stream Digital) 137
DSP Level (Sound Program menu) 98
DSP Program (front display information) 86
DTS Neo:6 Cinema (surround decoder) 56
DTS Neo:6 Music (surround decoder)
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) 89
Dynamic Range (Sound, Setup menu)
56
107
Front panel jack connection 34
Front Presence (Speaker, Setup menu)
Function (Setup menu) 114
E
G
ECO (Setup menu) 116
ECO Mode (ECO, Setup menu) 117
Enhancer (Option menu) 90
ENHANCER (sound mode) 57
ENTERTAINMENT (sound program subcategory) 54
Error indication (front display) 136
EX/ES (Extended Surround, Option menu) 89
EXTD Surround (Option menu) 89
Extended Surround (Option menu) 89
External device control (remote control) 123
External device operation key (remote control) 13
External power amplifier 24, 81
Extra Bass (Speaker, Setup menu) 105
GND terminal 34
Ground lead 34
F
Filter (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 111
FIRM UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 122
Firmware update 122
Firmware update (network) 122, 128
Firmware update (USB) 122
Firmware Version (System, Information menu) 118
Firmware version check 122
FM antenna connection 36
FM Mode (Option menu) 91
FM radio listening 58
FM/AM radio tuning 58
Format (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118
Frequency (FM/AM radio) 58
Frequency step setting 58, 120
Front (Speaker, Setup menu) 103
Front / Rear Balance (Sound Program menu) 98
Front display (part names and functions) 10
Front display brightness 114
Front display information 86
Front panel (part names and functions) 8
Front panel door (front panel) 8
104
H
Hall in Munich (sound program) 55
Hall in Vienna (sound program) 55
HD Radio™ information 60
HD Radio™ tuning 60
HDMI (Setup menu) 109
HDMI cable 25
HDMI connection (video device) 31
HDMI Control (HDMI, Setup menu) 109
HDMI jack 25
HDMI Monitor (Information menu) 118
HDMI OUT1 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 110
HDMI OUT2 (Audio Output, Setup menu) 110
HDMI OUT2 Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 113
HDMI output selection 49
HDMI signal compatibility 143
Headphones 53
Height Balance (Sound Program menu) 98
High definition audio 143
High speed HDMI cable 25
Hold/Unhold (HD Radio™, Option menu) 61
I
In.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 89
Indicator (part names and functions) 10
INFO key 9, 13
Information display (front display) 10
Information menu 117
Information switching (front display) 86
Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 98
Initial Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 107
Initial Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 112
INITIALIZE (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 121
APPENDIX
➤ Index
En
150
Input (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118
Input Assignment (Function, Setup menu) 114
Input jack assignment 114
Input menu 92
Input selection key (remote control) 13
Input Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 89
Internal Error (error indication) 136
Internal Error (YPAO error message) 47
Internet radio listening 75
IP Address (Network, Information menu) 118
IP Address (Network, Setup menu) 110
iPod charge 65
iPod connection 65
iPod content playback 66
iPod content playback (AirPlay) 77
iTunes content playback (AirPlay) 77
L
Language (Setup menu) 117
Learning (remote control) 125
Left / Right Balance (Sound Program menu) 98
Level (Sound Program menu) 98
Level (Speaker, Setup menu) 105
Level (YPAO measurement result) 45
Level Error (YPAO warning message) 48
LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 138
Lipsync 138
Lipsync (Sound, Setup menu) 106
LIVE/CLUB (sound program subcategory) 55
Liveness (Sound Program menu) 98
Load (Scene menu) 95
Low Frequency Effects (LFE) 138
M
MAC Address (MAC Address Filter, Setup menu) 111
MAC Address (Network, Information menu) 118
MAC Address Filter (Network, Setup menu) 111
Main Zone Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 112
Manual Setup (Speaker, Setup menu) 103
Manual speaker configuration 103
Manual station preset (FM/AM radio) 59
Max Volume (Sound, Setup menu) 107
Max Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 112
Measurement result (YPAO) 45
Media sharing setup 72
Memory Guard (Function, Setup menu) 116
Menu language selection 40
Menu operation key (front panel) 9
Menu operation key (remote control) 13
MHL cable 25
MHL connection 35
MHL jack 25
MHL Overloaded (error indication) 136
MHL-compatible mobile device 35
MODE key 13
Monaural Mix (Sound Program menu) 98
Monaural reception (FM radio) 58
Monaural reception (FM/AM radio) 58
Monitor check 121
MONITOR CHECK (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 121
Monitor Out Assign (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 113
Mono (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 113
Mono Movie (sound program) 54
MOVIE (sound program category) 54
MOVIE THEATER (sound program subcategory) 54
MULTI CH INPUT jack 12
Multi measurement (YPAO) 44
Multi Zone (Information menu) 118
Multi Zone (Setup menu) 112
Multi-channel analog connection 38
Multiple room playback 79
Multi-zone 79
Multi-zone output 141
MUSIC (sound program category) 55
Music Video (sound program) 54
MUTE key 13
Muting 49
N
NAS (Network Attached Storage)
NAS connection 37
37
NAS content playback 72
Network (Information menu) 118
Network (Setup menu) 110
Network Attached Storage (NAS) 37
Network cable 37
Network connection 37
Network information 118
Network Name (Network, Information menu) 118
Network Name (Network, Setup menu) 111
Network Standby (Network, Setup menu) 111
No content (error indication) 136
No device (error indication) 136
No F.PRNS SP (YPAO error message) 47
No Front SP (YPAO error message) 47
No MIC (YPAO error message) 47
No Signal (YPAO error message) 47
No Sur. SP (YPAO error message) 47
Noisy (YPAO error message) 47
Normal (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 45
NTSC (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120
Numeric key (remote control) 13
O
ON SCREEN key 13
OPTICAL jack 25
OPTION key 13
Option menu 87
Out of Phase (YPAO warning message) 48
Output (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118
Over Distance (YPAO warning message) 48
P
PAL (TV FORMAT, ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120
Panorama (Sound Program menu) 99
Parametric EQ (Speaker, Setup menu) 105
PARTY key 13
Party mode 85
Party Mode Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 113
PC connection 37
PC content playback 72
PHONES jack 9
APPENDIX
➤ Index
En
151
PHONO jack 11
Playback device connection 31
Playback device operation (remote control) 124
Please wait (error indication) 136
Power Amp Assign (Speaker, Setup menu) 103
Power cable connection 39
Power management 116
Power Mode (DC OUT, Setup menu) 115
PRE OUT jack 12
Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 59
Program Service (Radio Data System) 62
Program Type (Radio Data System) 62
Pure Direct 57
PURE DIRECT (sound mode) 57
Pure Direct Mode (Sound, Setup menu) 107
Q
Q factor
106
R
Radio Data System (FM radio) 62
Radio Data System information 62
Radio Data System tuning 62
Radio Text (Radio Data System) 62
Rear panel (part names and functions) 11
Recording device connection 37
RECOV./BACKUP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 121
RemID Mismatch (error indication) 136
REMOTE CON AMP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120
Remote connection 83
Remote control (part names and functions) 13
Remote control code registration
(playback device) 124
Remote control code registration (TV) 123
Remote Control Code Search 123, 124
Remote control ID setting 120
Remote control ID setting (remote control) 120
Remote control sensor 8
Remote control sensor setting 120
Remote control signal transmitter (remote control) 13
Remote ID (System, Information menu) 118
REMOTE IN jack 11
Remote Off (error indication) 136
REMOTE OUT jack 11
REMOTE SENSOR (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120
Rename (input name) 93
Rename (network name) 111
Rename (scene name) 96
Rename/Icon Select (Input menu) 93
Rename/Icon Select (Scene menu) 96
Repeat (iPod, Option menu) 68
Repeat (PC/NAS, Option menu) 74
Repeat (USB storage device, Option menu) 71
Reset (remote control) 127
Reset (Scene menu) 96
Resolution (Video Mode, Setup menu) 108
Reverb Delay (Sound Program menu) 98
Reverb Level (Sound Program menu) 98
Reverb Time (Sound Program menu) 98
Reverse (Wiring, YPAO measurement result) 45
Roleplaying Game (sound program) 54
Room Size (Sound Program menu) 98
Router connection 37
S
S VIDEO jack 25
Sampling (Audio Signal, Information menu) 118
Save (Scene menu) 95
SBR → SBL (YPAO error message) 47
Scene configuration 51
SCENE function 50
SCENE link playback 51
Scene menu 94
Sci-Fi (sound program) 54
Setting Data Copy (Speaker, Setup menu) 103
Setting Pattern (Speaker, Setup menu) 103
Setup menu 100
Short Message (Display Set, Setup menu) 114
Shuffle (iPod, Option menu) 68
Shuffle (PC/NAS. Option menu) 74
Shuffle (USB storage device, Option menu) 71
Signal information 118
SILENT CINEMA 53
Simple play (iPod) 67
Single measurement (YPAO) 43
Size (YPAO measurement result) 45
SLEEP key 13
Sleep timer 13
Sleep timer (Zone2) 85
Sound (Setup menu) 106
Sound field effect 53
Sound mode selection 52
Sound program 54, 55
Sound Program menu 97
Speaker (Setup menu) 103
Speaker cable connection 19
Speaker connection 15
SPEAKER IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 119
Speaker impedance 15
Speaker Impedance (System, Information menu) 118
Speaker impedance setting 18, 119
Speaker indicator (front display) 10
Speaker placement 16
Spectacle (sound program) 54
Sports (sound program) 54
Standard (sound program) 54
Standby indicator (front panel) 8
Standby Sync (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 109
Standby Through (HDMI, Setup menu) 110
Station Info (HD Radio™) 60
Station preset (FM/AM radio) 59
Status (Network, Information menu) 118
STEREO (sound program subcategory) 55
Stereo pin cable (RCA cable) 25
Stereo reception (FM radio) 58
Stereo reception (FM/AM radio) 58
STP network cable 37
STRAIGHT (sound mode) 56
Straight decode 56
Subnet Mask (IP Address, Setup menu) 110
Subnet Mask (Network, Information menu) 118
APPENDIX
➤ Index
En
152
Subwoofer (Speaker, Setup menu) 104
Subwoofer connection 19
Subwoofer Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 90
SUR.DECODE (sound mode) 56
Surround (Speaker, Setup menu) 104
Surround Back (Speaker, Setup menu) 104
Surround Back Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 98
Surround Back Liveness (Sound Program menu) 98
Surround Back Room Size (Sound Program menu) 98
Surround decoder 56
Surround Initial Delay (Sound Program menu) 98
Surround Liveness (Sound Program menu) 98
Surround Room Size (Sound Program menu) 98
S-video cable 25
S-video connection (video device) 32
SW.Trim (Volume Trim, Option menu) 90
System (Information menu) 118
System ID (System, Information menu) 118
TV connection (ARC-compatible TV) 26
TV connection (HDMI Control-compatible TV) 28
TV connection (TV with HDMI input jacks) 29
TV connection (TV without HDMI input jacks) 30
TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120
TV Format (System, Information menu) 118
TV operation (remote control) 123
TV operation key (remote control) 13
T
VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 122
Version error (error indication) 136
Video (Setup menu) 108
VIDEO AUX jack 9
Video device connection 31
VIDEO jack 25
Video Mode (Option menu) 90
Video Mode (Video, Setup menu) 108
Video Out (Input menu) 93
Video pin cable 25
Video Signal (Information menu) 118
Video signal flow 140
Video signal type setting 120
Virtual CINEMA DSP 53
Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 7
Voltage selection 39
VOLTAGE SELECTOR 11
Volume (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 112
Volume Interlock (Input menu) 93
Volume Trim (Option menu) 89
VPS (Virtual Presence Speaker) 7
Target Zone (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 115
Test Tone (Speaker, Setup menu) 106
The Bottom Line (sound program) 55
The Roxy Theatre (sound program) 55
Tone Control (Option menu) 88
TONE/BALANCE key 9
TP (Traffic Program) 63
Traffic information (Radio Data System) 63
Traffic Program (FM radio, Option menu) 63
Treble (Tone Control, Option menu) 88
Trigger function 38
Trigger Mode (Trigger Output, Setup menu) 115
TRIGGER OUT jack 11
Trigger Output1 (Function, Setup menu) 115
Trigger Output2 (Function, Setup menu) 115
Tuner Freq. Step (System, Information menu) 118
TUNER FRQ STEP (ADVANCED SETUP menu) 120
Turntable connection 34
TV Audio Input (HDMI Control, Setup menu) 109
TV connection 26
U
Unable to play (error indication) 136
USB jack 9
USB mass storage class device 69
USB Overloaded (error indication) 136
USB storage device connection 69
USB storage device content playback 69
User Cancel (YPAO error message) 47
V
W
Wallpaper (Display Set, Setup menu) 114
Wiring (YPAO measurement result) 45
Y
Yamaha Parametric room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) 41
YPAO
(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer
YPAO error message 47
YPAO MIC jack 9
YPAO microphone 41
YPAO warning message 48
41
Z
Zone Rename (Main Zone Set, Setup menu) 112
Zone Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 113
Zone Scene Rename (Zone2 Set, Setup menu) 113
Zone2 Set (Multi Zone, Setup menu) 112
Zone2 speaker connection 23, 80
APPENDIX
➤ Index
En
153
© 2013 Yamaha Corporation YF341A0/EN